JP6675561B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a special game according to a result of determining whether or not to execute a special game.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, a special game including a plurality of long opening round games for long opening a special winning opening is executed, and during the long opening round game, During the round, a current round number is displayed, or an image prompting the player to make a right strike is displayed (for example, see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2014-144110 A

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, it cannot be said that an appropriate display is always performed during execution of a special game.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an appropriate display during execution of a special game.

The present invention has the following features to attain the object mentioned above.
A gaming machine according to the present invention is provided in a game area in which a game ball flows down, and a variable prize means that can be changed to a non-passing state in which the game ball does not pass, and an easy passage state in which the game ball easily passes, A special prize area provided in a prize means, in which a game ball can be awarded, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game for controlling the variable prize means to the easy passing state, and the determination means When it is determined that the special game is to be executed, the special game executing means for executing the special game, a first game state, and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be controlled. Game state control means, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, wherein the game state control means is based on the fact that a game ball has won the special prize area when the special game is being executed, The special game The game state after the end can be controlled to the second game state, and the effect control means displays an instruction image for instructing launch of a game ball into the special winning area during execution of the special game. The predetermined prize that the variable prize means is in the non-passing state when the game ball does not pass through the special prize area even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect and the variable prize means have entered the easy passage state. The second effect of counting down and displaying the remaining time up to the reference time with the time before the reference time as the reference time can be executed and controlled.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform an appropriate display during execution of a special game.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 Schematic diagram of the small winning opening 19, the large winning opening 13, and the slide member 17 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the game state Explanatory diagram for explaining various tables used for special symbol determination Screen diagram illustrating a screen configuration of liquid crystal screen 5 in a normal game state. Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of reach production Screen diagram for explaining the relationship between decorative symbols and small symbols Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of productions that evolve into SPSP reach via SP reach (part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of productions that evolve into SPSP reach through SP reach (part 2) Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects that evolve into SPSP reach via SP reach (part 3) Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of the icon effect performed using the icon Screen diagram showing a specific example of icon change success production Screen diagram showing specific examples of rewind suggestion effects and failed rewind effects Screen diagram showing a specific example of a successful upper icon change effect Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach rewind effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of reach rewind effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of the reach reproduction effect performed after the reach rewind effect Explanatory diagram illustrating an end condition for ending a time-saving gaming state. Time chart for explaining screen display during small hit game Screen diagram showing a specific example of screen display during the small hit game Screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time-saving gaming state Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the RUSH challenge battle Time chart for explaining the effects performed during the RUSH challenge battle and the display mode of the small symbols Screen diagram showing a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle (part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle (part 2) Screen diagram showing a specific example of RUSH challenge battle (part 3) Screen diagram showing specific example of RUSH challenge battle (part 4) Screen diagram showing specific example of RUSH challenge battle (part 5) Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of the rewind effect performed in the first rotation of the time saving when the number of time savings is set to five times FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the switch processing in step S2 in FIG. 33 Detailed flowchart of the first startup port switch process in step S21 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second startup port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 34 Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination processing in steps S218 and S229 in FIGS. Detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S24 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection processing in step S310 in FIG. 39 39 is a detailed flowchart of the stopped process in step S319 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the ordinary symbol processing in step S4 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the slide member control process in step S5 in FIG. Detailed Flowchart of Small Winning Port Opening Control Processing in Step S6 of FIG. 33 (Part 1) Detailed Flowchart of Small Winning Opening Control Processing in Step S6 of FIG. 33 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. 47 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in effect control board 130 Detailed flowchart of the command receiving process in step S10 in FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of the hold command receiving process in step 103 of FIG. 50 Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command receiving process in step S106 in FIG. 50 Detailed flowchart of processing during opening of the small winning opening in step S33 in FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of the result effect control process in step S43 of FIG. 49 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140. Detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 71 of FIG. 55

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Schematic configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type and two-type mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with an accessory or the like for winning or determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined distance from the game board 2, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. Have been.

  The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to a launching device (not shown). The lower plate 29 stores game balls as prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 1. When the player operates the takeout button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened to allow the game balls to be opened. Is discharged. In addition, these plates 28 and 29 may be constituted by one plate.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game ball guided from the upper plate 28 to the launching device has a playing area with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 21. Fired to the upper position at 10. The game area 10 is provided with a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown), and the fired game ball is moved along the game board 2 while changing its moving direction by contacting the game nail, the windmill, and the like. Fall. Note that when the player operates the stop button 22, the firing of the game ball is temporarily stopped.

  When "left hit" is performed in which the lever 21 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively weak hitting force, and flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. I do. On the other hand, when "right hit" is performed in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively strong hitting force, and the right area in the game area 10 as illustrated by an arrow 32. Flow down.

  A first starting port 11 and three normal winning ports 14 are provided on the passage path of the left-hit game ball as an accessory relating to winning or determination. On the other hand, in the passing path of the right-hitting game ball, there are a gate 16, a small winning opening 19, one normal winning opening 14, a large winning opening 13, a second starting opening 12, and a slide, as an accessory relating to winning or determination. A member 17 is provided.

  In the process of flowing down the game area 10 along the game board 2, the game balls launched into the game area 10 flow through the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the large winning port 13, the small winning port 19, and the normal There is a case where one of the winning openings 14 is entered to win a prize. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. It should be noted that the game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first starting port 11 is a starting area that is always open, and when a game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins, it is determined whether or not a big hit (a so-called one-type big hit) is made. Is displayed on the first special symbol display 41 of the display 4 (see FIG. 3). Here, when the symbol indicating the big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, a plurality of round games (seven times in this embodiment: see FIG. 6C) for opening the big winning port 13 are executed.

  The second starting port 12 is a starting area which is always open, and a guide member for guiding a game ball moving on the slide member 17 to the second starting port 12 in front of the second starting port 12. 64 (see FIGS. 2B and 2C). When a game ball is guided to the guide member 64 by the slide member 17 as a normal electric accessory, the game ball wins the second starting port 12 (FIGS. 2C-2 to C-5). reference). On the other hand, when the game ball is not guided to the guide member 64 by the slide member 17, the game ball does not win the second starting port 12.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins, it is determined whether or not a big hit (so-called one type) or a small hit (so-called two types), and the determination result. Is displayed on the second special symbol display 42 of the display 4 (see FIG. 3). Here, when the big hit symbol notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed, a plurality of round games using the special winning opening 13 for all round games are executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit symbol notifying the small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game using the small winning opening 19 and the second and subsequent round games using the large winning opening 13 are executed. You.

As will be described in detail later, a V winning opening switch 198 (see FIG. 2) is provided inside the small winning opening 19. The V winning opening switch 198 forms a V winning opening that, when a small hit is made, regards the small hitting game as the first round and starts a round game after the second round.
If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second round of the second round is performed on condition that the gaming ball has passed the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened (that is, the V winning). The game is started. In this case, at the end of the jackpot game composed of the second and subsequent round games, the gaming state shifts from the “normal gaming state” to the “time saving gaming state”. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 in the small winning opening 19 during the small hitting game, the round game after the second round is not executed, and the game state is “time saving”. Game state ".

In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and on condition that a game ball is won on the second starting port 12. The determination to be performed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.
Further, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, an advantageous game that is advantageous to a player composed of an open game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened is referred to as a “small hitting game”, and a round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened is referred to as “small winning game”. An advantageous game that is advantageous to the configured player is called a “big hit game”, and the two are distinguished.

<Grand Prize Winner 13>
The big winning opening 13 is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination (the big hit symbol notifying that it is one kind is stopped and displayed). In the big winning opening 13, a small hit symbol that informs that two kinds of hits are stopped is displayed, and the passing of the game ball to the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hitting game executed in response thereto (V winning) ) Is also released.
A slide member 38 (see FIG. 2B) that can slide in the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 is provided in the opening of the special winning opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by the slide member 38. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), or when the game ball wins V during the small hit game, the slide member 38 is turned off. A big hit game in which the big winning opening 13 is opened by sliding to the back side of the gaming machine 1 is executed. During the jackpot game, a predetermined condition (in the present embodiment, winning of 10 game balls into the special winning opening 13 or 29.5 seconds after the opening of the special winning opening 13) is satisfied. A long open round game that is closed after the 13 is maintained in the open state is executed a predetermined number of times at predetermined time intervals.

The jackpot game is also executed when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 in the small winning opening 19 during the small winning game. The game is regarded as the first round, and the round games of the second and subsequent rounds constituting the jackpot game are consumed using the special winning opening 13.
On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started.

  During the jackpot game, a long open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is long opened is executed, and, for example, 12 prize balls are paid out each time a gaming ball is awarded in the large winning opening 13, so that the player can play the big hit game. By making a right-handed inside, more prize balls can be obtained than when no jackpot game is performed.

<Composition of the small winning opening 19>
2 (A-1) to 2 (A-3) are schematic perspective views showing the internal structure of the small winning opening 19. FIG. The small winning opening 19 is opened when it is determined in the second special symbol determination that it is a small hit. As illustrated in FIG. 2, a slide member 191 slidable in the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 is provided in the opening of the small winning opening 19. The small winning opening 19 is normally closed by the slide member 191. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a small hit game in which the slide member 191 slides to the rear side of the gaming machine 1 to open the small winning opening 19 is executed. You. During the small hit game, the slide member 191 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21) in which the small winning opening 19 is opened ten times over a period from the opening of the small winning opening 19 to the elapse of 15 seconds. The opening game of the small hit game to be operated is executed. In addition, when ten game balls win the small winning opening 19 during the opening game (the tenth gaming ball is detected by the small winning opening switch 194 (see FIG. 2)), the slide member 191 is provided. Is stopped, and the small hitting game ends. The small hitting game also ends when the operation of the slide member 191 in the predetermined opening pattern ends (that is, when 15 seconds have elapsed since the small winning opening 19 was opened).

  During the opening game, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 21, the slide member 191 operates in an opening pattern in which a short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds and then closing the opening is repeated ten times. I do.

  During the small hitting game, the small winning opening 19 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern, and for example, 12 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball wins in the small winning opening 19, so that the player is in the small hitting game. By right-handing, more prize balls can be obtained compared to when the small hit game is not performed.

  By the way, the game ball hit right moves on the small winning opening 19 (on the slide member 191) as exemplified by the arrow 33 (see FIG. 1). Above the small winning opening 19, although not shown in the figure, the left wall, which is contacted when the game ball moves to the back side of the game machine 1, and the game ball moves to the front side of the game machine 1. The right wall that comes into contact with the door when it is pressed is provided at a predetermined interval. And, on these left and right walls, there are provided regulating pieces 192 projecting toward the center in the width direction (the depth direction of the gaming machine 1) of the slide member 191 for closing the small winning opening 19 (FIG. 2). Therefore, the game ball flows down on the slide member 191 so as to meander while abutting on the left and right regulating pieces 192 (see the arrow in FIG. 2A-1). As a result, the time that the game ball stays on the slide member 191 can be made longer than in the case where the regulating piece 192 is not provided. Therefore, during the open game in which the slide member 191 operates in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21) during the open game, the game ball that has reached the slide member 191 while the small winning opening 19 is closed is moved to the small winning opening 19. Can remain on the slide member 191 until it is next opened. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing over the slide member 191 without winning the small winning opening 19 during the small hitting game, and the opening time of the small winning opening 19 is 0.044. Even if the time is very short, such as seconds, it is possible to cause the small winning prize port 19 to easily win a game ball.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 2A-1 to 2A-3, inside the small winning opening 19, a small winning opening switch 194, a loss winning opening switch 197, a V winning opening switch 198, and A slide member 195 is provided.

  When the small hit game is not performed, the small winning opening 19 is closed by the slide member 191, the V winning opening switch 198 is opened, and the loss winning opening switch 197 is closed by the slide member 195 (FIG. 2). (See (A-1)).

On the other hand, when the opening game constituting the small hit game is started, the slide member 191 slides to the back side of the gaming machine 1 to open the small winning opening 19 (FIG. 2 (A-2)). reference). In the state where the small winning opening 19 is opened, as illustrated in FIG. 2 (A-2), after the game ball that has entered the inside of the small winning opening 19 passes through the small winning opening switch 194, the regulating member. 195 and the right inclined portion 196, and then passes through the V winning opening switch 198 (see the arrow in FIG. 2A-2). Then, if at least one game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198, a round game after the second round in which the large winning opening 13 is opened is performed.
In some cases, the game ball that has entered the inside of the small winning opening 19 passes through the small winning opening switch 194 after moving on the left inclined portion 193.

  During the opening game of the small hitting game, the number of game balls passing through the small winning opening switch 194 is counted, and the slide member 195 is provided on condition that the ninth game ball passes the small winning opening switch 194. Slides to the back side of the gaming machine 1, and the losing winning port switch 197 is opened (see FIG. 2 (A-3)). For this reason, the tenth game ball that has entered the small winning opening 19 during the small hitting game is guided to the loss winning opening switch 197 instead of the V winning opening switch 198.

  After the slide member 191 moves to the position where the small winning opening 19 is opened, the operation in the predetermined opening pattern is completed, or on condition that ten game balls pass through the small winning opening switch 194. It returns to the position where the small winning opening 19 is closed.

  As described above, since the small hitting game ball can easily pass the game ball to the V winning opening switch 198, the big hit game following the small hitting game can be easily performed as long as the player makes a right hit. It is possible to raise it.

  In addition, a large "V" is written on a member provided at a position corresponding to an area in which the small winning opening switch 194, the loss winning opening switch 197, the V winning opening switch 198, and the like are included. A small letter “V” is written at a position corresponding to the winning opening switch 198 (see FIG. 1).

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the small winning opening 19 is a V attacker including the V winning opening switch 198 by seeing the large letter “V”. Further, the position of the V winning opening switch 198 (the position of the V region) can be easily specified by looking at the small letter “V”. In addition, the above-mentioned member is formed of a transparent acrylic member or the like, and the player can pass through the acrylic member to the small winning opening switch 194, the slide member 195, the loss winning opening switch 197, the V winning opening switch 198, and the like. It is possible to see it.

<Slide member 17>
FIG. 2B is a schematic front view illustrating the configuration of the slide member 17 and its surroundings, and FIGS. 2C-1 to 2C-5 are schematic plan views of the slide member 17. A slide member 17 for guiding a game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided between the regulation wall 63 and the guide member 64 in the right area of the game area 10. The slide member 17 is configured to be movable between a storage position (see FIG. 2C-1) and a guide position (see FIG. 2C-2). Here, the guide position is such that the slide member 17 protrudes from the surface of the game board 2 to the right region, thereby supporting a game ball flowing down the right region as shown by an arrow 36, for example, and the guide member 64. It is a position where the game ball can be guided to. One storage position is a position where the slide member 17 does not protrude from the surface of the game board 2 as illustrated in FIG. 2 (C-1).

  As illustrated in FIG. 2B, in a state where the special winning opening 13 is closed by the slide member 38, a game ball passing over the slide member 38 collides with the regulation wall 61 and is placed on the inclined member 62. After moving on the inclined member 62, it collides with another regulating wall 63. Here, when the slide member 17 is located at the guide position, the game ball that has collided with the regulation wall 63 falls to the left end of the slide member 17. However, the slide member 17 is normally arranged at the storage position (see FIG. 2 (C-1)). Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the regulation wall 63 falls along the regulation wall 63 and is finally discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  On the right side of the slide member 17, there is provided a guide member 64 for guiding the game ball moved on the slide member 17 to the second starting port 12 (FIGS. 2 (C-1) and (C-2)). reference). The guide member 64 has a bottom portion 641 that supports the game ball, and a curved wall portion 642 that can guide the game ball that has moved from the slide member 17 to above the bottom portion 641 to the back side of the gaming machine 1. (See FIG. 2 (C-1)).

  In a state where the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position (see FIG. 2C-2), a game ball that has collided with the regulation wall 63 falls to the left end of the slide member 17. The slide member 17 is inclined so that the game ball supported by the slide member 17 can be guided to the guide member 64 (see FIG. 2B). For this reason, if the state in which the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position continues for a predetermined time (about 1.2 seconds in the present embodiment), the game ball that has moved on the slide member 17 reaches the guide member 64. Then, the player wins the second starting port 12.

As described above, although the second start port 12 is a start area which is always open, the state where the slide member 17 is disposed at the storage position or the state where the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position is maintained for a predetermined time. If the game ball does not continue, the game ball colliding with the regulation wall 63 falls without reaching the guide member 64. For this reason, the game ball does not normally win the second starting port 12.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not the slide member 17 is operated. Here, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated, the operation of returning to the storage position is performed a specified number of times after a predetermined time has elapsed since the slide member 17 moved to the guide position. As described above, the second starting port 12 is arranged such that the game ball does not win when the slide member 17 is located at the storage position, whereas the slide member 17 is located at the guide position and the state continues for a predetermined time or more. By doing so, a game ball can be won.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled in a “normal gaming state” or a “time saving gaming state” described later. When it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated while the game is being controlled in the “time saving game state”, the operation to return to the storage position after 1.92 seconds elapses after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. It is performed twice.
FIG. 2 (C-2) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which a game ball has fallen to the left end of the slide member 17 immediately after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. FIG. 2 (C-3) illustrates the position of the game ball at a timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the slide member 17 was arranged at the guide position, and FIG. The position of the game ball at the timing when 1.0 second has elapsed after being placed at the guide position is illustrated. FIG. 2 (C-5) illustrates the position of the game ball at a timing when 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the slide member 17 was arranged at the guide position. As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 2 (C-2) to (C-5), when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated in the time saving game state, the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position. While the state continues for 1.92 seconds, the game ball that has fallen immediately after the slide member 17 has been placed at the guide position reaches the second starting port 12 after about 1.2 seconds.

  For this reason, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated in the time saving game state, the player can easily make the second starting port 12 win a game ball by right-handing. It is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated while the game is being controlled in the “normal game state”, the slide member 17 returns to the storage position when 0.036 seconds elapse after the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position. The operation is performed once. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 2 (C-3), a game ball that has fallen on the slide member 17 immediately after the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position has the slide member 17 disposed at the guide position. At a timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the time, the light reaches only the vicinity of the center of the slide member 17. For this reason, when 0.036 seconds have elapsed since the slide member 17 was placed at the guide position and the slide member 17 returns to the storage position, the slide member 17 will fall.

  For this reason, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated while the game is being controlled in the “normal game state”, it is impossible to cause the second starting port 12 to win a game ball.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open similarly to the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls are paid out by winning a game ball. It should be noted that, unlike the first starting port 11 or the like, no determination is made even if a game ball wins in the normal winning port 14.

  The game balls that have passed over the slide member 191 of the small winning opening 19 are sorted by game nails and guide members. That is, the right-hitting game ball can enter the normal winning opening 14 provided in the right game area 10 in the process of flowing down as exemplified by the arrows 32, 33, and 34 (see FIG. 1). In the process of flowing down as shown by arrows 32, 33, and 35 (see FIG. 1), the right-hit game ball wins the special winning opening 13 if the special winning opening 13 is opened. If the special winning opening 13 is closed, it flows down as exemplified by the arrow 36 (see FIGS. 1 and 2B).

The game ball flowing down as exemplified by the arrow 36 can enter the second starting port 12 when the state in which the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position continues for 1.92 seconds in the time saving game state. On the other hand, at other times, the game is discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18 without winning the second start port 12.
Further, as illustrated by arrows 32, 33, and 34 (see FIG. 1), a game ball that has flowed down may go to the second starting port 12 without winning the normal winning port 14.

Since the right side area of the game area 10 and the area inside the small winning opening 19 are partitioned by an acrylic member or the like, a game ball passing over the slide member 191 enters the small winning opening 19. In this case, the flow mainly flows down the right region as exemplified by the arrows 32 to 35.
Further, since the right side area and the area inside the special winning opening 13 are partitioned by an acrylic member or the like, the game balls passing over the slide member 38 (see FIG. 2B) Without moving into the inside, the user moves on the inclined member 62 (see FIG. 2B).

[Example of configuration of production means of gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, on the game board 2 and the frame member 3, a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, a production character 7, a speaker 24, a frame lamp 25 ( 4), a board lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) and the like.

  The main liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device for displaying effect images, and a display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter, referred to as a “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position that is easily recognized by a player. . On the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, characters and items performing a notice effect, etc., and reserved images (reserved icons) displayed as many as the number of the first special symbol determination suspended ), It is possible to display an effect image including various display objects such as the icon indicating that the special symbol is being displayed while being changed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is disposed above the main liquid crystal display device 5 and in front of the gaming machine 1 with respect to the main liquid crystal display device 5. As the sub liquid crystal display device 6, a display device having a smaller display screen than that of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used, and is mainly used for a suggestion effect indicating the jackpot reliability. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is configured to be able to descend to a position covering the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and for example, descends to the position during a predetermined suggestion effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. .

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are provided, but the number of image display devices may be one, or may be three or more.

  The speaker 24 performs a sound effect by outputting music, voice, sound effects, and the like in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  Renderings 7 are arranged in front and side of liquid crystal screen 5. The stage effect 7 includes a light-emitting element (eg, LED). The effect combination 7 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the accessory itself and / or light. In the present embodiment, the stage production 7 is configured in a shape imitating a star, is configured to be rotatable about the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 as an axial direction, and is configured to be able to rotate from the side of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the liquid crystal screen 5. Is configured to be movable forward.

  Although not shown in the figure, the board lamp 25 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2, and the frame lamp 37 is built in the frame member 3. The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing a lighting or blinking pattern and changing a light emission color.

[Configuration Example of Input Means of Gaming Machine 1]
The frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to make an input (see FIG. 1). The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for allowing a player to perform a selection operation or a cursor movement, and includes an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, an effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information relating to the special symbol determination and the ordinary symbol determination. As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the first special symbol It has a symbol hold display 43, a second special symbol hold display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol hold display 46, and a game state display 47.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 determines the first special symbol determination by variably displaying the symbols and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Report results. On the first special symbol display 41, as a symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination, a big hit symbol for notifying one kind or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the symbol variably and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination, thereby determining the second special symbol determination. Report results. On the second special symbol display 42, as a symbol for notifying the determination result of the second special symbol determination, a large hit symbol notifying one type, a small hit symbol notifying the two types, or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  By the way, when a game ball newly wins in the first start-up opening 11 during the change display of the symbol related to the special symbol determination or during the big hit game (or the small hit game), the first special symbol judgment triggered by the winning is performed. The change display of the symbol cannot be executed immediately. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved when the first special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately even when the game ball is won in the first starting port 11. The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination thus retained.

  The same applies to a case where a new game ball is awarded in the second starting port 12 during the display of the symbol related to the special symbol determination or during the big hit game (or the small hit game). When the second special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately even if the ball is won, the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved, and the second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the second reserved symbol 44 in this manner. The number of reserved special symbol judgments is displayed.

  When the ordinary symbol determination is performed, the ordinary symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination by changing and displaying the symbol and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination. In addition, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, such as during the variable display of the symbol on the normal symbol display 45, when the normal symbol determination and the symbol variable display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed, the normal symbol is displayed. The right to judge is reserved. On the ordinary symbol holding display 46, the number of the ordinary symbol judgments thus held is displayed.

  The gaming state display 47 displays the gaming state at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine 1. When the big hit symbol (or the small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), the round indicator 48 opens the large winning opening 13 during the big hit game. (Or the opening pattern of the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game) is displayed.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42 is called “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 45 is “ordinary symbol”. Shall be called. Also, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol indicator 42 is called "second special symbol", and both are designated. It may be distinguished.

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1.
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls sent to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. As exemplified in FIG. 4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 is a game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game, such as various determinations and command transmission, and controls the production based on the command received from the game control board 100. And an image and sound control board 140 for controlling effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 for controlling effects by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like.
The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured by one board.

[Configuration Example of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various calculation processes related to the determination and the number of payout prize balls based on a program or the like stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

  The game control board 100 includes a first starting port switch 111, a second starting port switch 112, a slide member control unit 113, a gate switch 114, a special winning opening switch 115, a special winning opening control unit 116, a normal winning opening switch 117, The small winning opening switch 194, the small winning opening / closing section 118, the V winning opening switch 198, the loss winning opening / closing switch 197, the loss winning opening / closing section 119, and the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the display 4 are connected. .

  The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first starting port 11, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second starting port 12, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The slide member control unit 113 controls the operation of the slide member 17 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 17 so as to be able to transmit the drive in response to a control signal from the game control board 100.

  The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The special winning opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the special winning opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The special winning opening control unit 116 activates an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 38 closing the special winning opening 13 so as to be able to transmit the drive, in accordance with a control signal from the game control board 100, thereby controlling the special winning opening 13 Open and close. The normal winning opening switch 117 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning opening 14 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The small winning opening switch 194 detects that a game ball has won the small winning opening 19 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The small winning opening opening / closing section 118 opens and closes the small winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 191 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 198 detects that the vehicle has entered the V region, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The loss winning port switch 197 detects that the game ball has entered the loss area, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The prize hole opening / closing section 119 opens and closes the prize hole switch 197 (los area) by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 195 so as to be able to transmit the drive.

  The main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a detection signal from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, or the small winning port switch 194. The payout control board (not shown) instructs the payout control board (not shown) to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and manages the number of prize balls to be paid out based on information from the payout control board.

  The payout control board includes a drive motor and the like for sending a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2 to the dish 28.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, at the timing when the detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired.

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of the jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot symbol. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether an effect with a reach or an effect without a reach is to be performed when it is determined that a loss has occurred. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variation manner.

  Upon obtaining these random numbers, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on whether or not the obtained jackpot random numbers match a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (per kind). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed (big jackpot), the jackpot symbol random number is determined based on which of the predetermined random number values stored in the main ROM 102 matches the jackpot symbol random number. The type (see FIG. 6C) is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not to be executed, that is, in the case of a losing, whether to perform the effect with reach based on whether the obtained reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102 or not. Or whether to perform a reachless production. In addition, regardless of whether or not to play the jackpot game, the first variation of the first special symbol based on which random number value the acquired variation pattern random number matches with the random number value stored in the main ROM 102 is displayed. Determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern. Thus, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal is input from the second starting port switch 112, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, at the timing when the detection signal is input from the second starting port switch 112, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired.

  Here, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are as described above. On the other hand, the small hit symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of the small hit when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit.

  When the main CPU 101 obtains these random numbers, first, based on whether or not the obtained jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot game (or a small jackpot game). It is determined whether or not to execute. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit (per type) or a small hit (per two types). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed (big jackpot), the jackpot symbol random number is determined based on which of the predetermined random number values stored in the main ROM 102 matches the jackpot symbol random number. The type (see FIG. 6C) is determined. When it is determined that the small hit game is to be executed (small hit), based on which of the predetermined random number values stored in the main ROM 102 the obtained small hit symbol random number matches, The type of the small hit (see FIG. 6D) is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game (or the small hit game) is not executed, that is, in the case of a losing, based on whether or not the obtained reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach. In addition, regardless of whether or not to play a big hit game (or a small hit game), the second special symbol is changed based on which random number value stored in the main ROM 102 matches the obtained change pattern random number. A variation pattern of the second special symbol at the time of display is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined.

  In the present embodiment, a case in which the type of the big hit and the type of the small hit are determined by using two kinds of random numbers, a big hit symbol random number and a small hit symbol random number, will be described. Both the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined using random numbers. Specifically, in the symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot illustrated in FIG. 6C, not only the type of the jackpot (three types shown in FIG. 6C) but also the Types (three types shown in FIG. 6D) are also associated. Then, based on which jackpot symbol random number acquired when the gaming ball has won the second starting port 12 matches any random value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot or Decide the type of small hit.

If the main CPU 101 determines that a big hit has been won, the main CPU 101 executes a big hit game in which the big win port 13 is opened and closed via the big winning port control unit 116 based on the result of the determination of the type of the big hit.
If the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit is a small hit, the main CPU 101 executes a small hit game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened and closed via the small winning opening control unit 118 based on the determination result of the type of the small hit. .
When the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 198 is input during the small hitting game, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control unit 116 following the small hitting game. Perform the game.

Then, when the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot game according to the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination), the game after the end of the jackpot game based on the type of the jackpot determined before the start of the jackpot game. Control the state.
On the other hand, in the case of executing the small hitting game according to the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 executes the small hitting game before starting the small hitting game on condition that the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hitting game. Based on the determined small hit type, the game state after the big hit game (performed after the small hit game) is controlled. That is, when the big hit game ends, the game state is set to the “time saving game state”. If the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed, and the above-mentioned game state performed when the big hit game ends is referred to as a "time saving game state". Is not performed, so that the small hitting game is controlled in the "normal game state" at the end of the small hitting game.

  Further, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number at a timing when the detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and performs a normal symbol determination using the obtained random number. When it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated, the slide member 17 is operated via the slide member control unit 113.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes the respective displays 41 to 48 constituting the display 4 to execute the above-described processing based on FIG.

[Configuration Example of Effect Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs an arithmetic process when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

  The sub CPU 131 sets the effect contents (effect pattern) based on the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination transmitted from the game control board 100, the game information on the big hit game, the small hit game, and the like. At that time, there is a case where the input of operation information from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is received, and the effect contents according to the operation information are set. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect of the set effect contents to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Configuration Example of Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
The image and sound control board 140 includes an overall CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the control ROM 142, the overall CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image or sound representing an effect in which the effect content is set on the effect control board 130. The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the overall CPU 141 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

  The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The sound DSP 145 generates sound data output from the speaker 24. The overall CPU 141 generates a control signal based on a command from the effect control board 130 and a program stored in the control ROM 142, and outputs the control signal to the VDP 144 and the audio DSP 145, whereby the VDP 144 and the audio DSP 145 Control behavior.

  Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 mainly stores an image ROM for storing material data necessary for generating a rendering image, a rendering engine for performing rendering processing of the rendering image, and a rendering image rendered by the rendering engine. It has an output circuit for outputting to the liquid crystal display device 5 (or the sub liquid crystal display device 6). The drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the centralized CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the main liquid crystal display device 5 (or the sub liquid crystal display device 6) at a predetermined timing.

  Although not shown in the figure, the sound DSP 145 is used as a sound ROM for storing various sound data relating to sound effects such as music, sound, and sound effects, and a work area for data processing and the like by the sound DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The sound DSP 145 reads sound data corresponding to the control signal from the central CPU 141 from the sound ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the sound data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

[Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 performs an arithmetic process for controlling the operations of the stage combination 7, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

  The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the light emitting element, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like included in the presentation character 7. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the stage combination 7 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  The lamp CPU 151 reads out, from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152, light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 into the lamp RAM 153, and emits the light emitting element and the board lamp 25 included in the effect actor 7. , The light emission of the frame lamp 37 is controlled. Further, the lamp CPU 151 reads out operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 into the lamp RAM 153, and renders the effect character 7 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. To control the driving of the motor that operates the.

  Further, when the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated by the player, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command for notifying the operation to the effect control board 130.

[Explanation of judgment result of special symbol judgment and change of game state]
Next, a gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game is controlled in a “normal gaming state” or a “time reduction gaming state”.

  The “normal game state” is a low base state in which a game ball does not easily enter the second starting port 12. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the slide member 17 is operated in the “normal gaming state”, the ratio determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 256/256), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set. Is set to a relatively long time (for example, 8 seconds), and the operation time of the slide member 17 when it is determined to operate the slide member 17 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.036 seconds). You.

  On the other hand, the “time-saving game state” is a high base state in which game balls easily enter the second starting port 12. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the slide member 17 is operated in the “time reduction gaming state”, the ratio determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 256/256), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set. Is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated, the operation time of the slide member 17 is relatively long (for example, 3.84 seconds = 1). .92 seconds × 2).

<Selection of fluctuation pattern>
Note that, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of time savings in which the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed is set to one in the "time saving gaming state" after the end of the jackpot game. There are cases where the number is set to 5 and cases where the number is set to 100. The variation pattern of the second special symbol selected in the “time saving gaming state” has the following features.

(When the number of times saved is set to 1)
When the number of time savings is set to one, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is relatively long (130 seconds in the present embodiment). Selected. Then, when up to four second special symbol determination reserves accumulated when the second special symbol is variably displayed in this variation pattern are consumed, the second special symbol variation pattern is set as the second special symbol variation pattern. (2) A fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short is always selected.
In this manner, when the suspension related to the second special symbol determination is exhausted, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short is selected, but in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is exhausted. When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing”, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected, and when the result is “small hit”, the second special symbol is determined. Is selected as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is slightly longer 16 seconds.

(When the number of time savings is set to 5)
When the number of time savings is set to five, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol from the first rotation of the time saving to the fourth rotation of the time saving. Specifically, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing” from the first rotation to the fourth rotation of the time reduction, and it is determined that the effect without reach is performed, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is changed. A variation pattern with a time of 30 seconds is selected. In the present embodiment, when the 30-second variation pattern is selected, the pseudo shortened variation in which the decorative pattern is fluctuated for 2 seconds and then pseudo-stopped for 0.5 seconds is repeated 10 times, and a loss effect is performed without performing a reach effect. A notification effect is performed.

The first rotation of the time saving is as follows.
That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time saving is “big hit” or “small hit”, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60 seconds or 35 seconds is obtained. Selected.
When a variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, a reach is established in any of the pseudo shortening fluctuations of the repeated pseudo shortening fluctuation, and a hit notification effect is performed in the reach effect after the reach is established.
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of 35 seconds is selected, an immediate hit effect is performed to make it appear that a small hit (or a big hit) has occurred without performing the pseudo shortening change. The instant hit effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
In addition, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time saving is “losing” and it is determined that the effect with the reach is to be performed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60 seconds. A certain variation pattern is selected. When the variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, reach is established in any of the repeated pseudo shortening fluctuations of the repeated pseudo shortening fluctuation, and a loss notification effect is performed in the reach effect after the reach is established.

  In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time saving is “small hit” or “big hit”, the appearance rate of the immediate hit effect is too high, In order to suppress a decrease in interest, the selection ratio at which the variation pattern of 35 seconds is selected is set to a lower value than the selection ratio at which the variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected.

  Also, here, for convenience of explanation, a case where a variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected when a reach effect is performed has been described as an example. However, for example, when a variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, the tenth variation pattern is selected. When the reach is established by the pseudo shortened fluctuation and develops to reach production, and the fluctuation pattern of 57 seconds is selected, the reach is established by the ninth pseudo shortened fluctuation and develops to reach production, and the fluctuation pattern of 54 seconds In the case where is selected, a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times are actually prepared, such that the reach is established by the eighth pseudo shortened variation and the reach is developed.

  The second rotation of the time reduction to the fourth rotation of the time reduction are the same as the first rotation of the time reduction except that a fluctuation pattern of 35 seconds in which an immediate hit effect is performed is not selected.

  Regarding the fifth rotation of the time saving, similarly to the first rotation of the time saving when the number of time savings is set to one, the variation pattern of 130 seconds is always selected, and the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is variably displayed. An effect similar to the RUSH challenge battle performed using the period is performed. The RUSH challenge battle will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

(When the number of times saved is set to 100)
On the other hand, if the number of time savings is set to 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1.5 seconds is selected regardless of the determination result of the second special symbol determination.

  Due to the board configuration of the gaming board 2, it is possible for a left-hit game ball to enter the first starting port 11, while a right-hit game ball cannot enter the first starting port 11. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player makes a left-handed shot aiming at winning the game ball to the first starting port 11. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed. Here, when it is determined that a big hit (per kind), the type of the big hit is determined. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, three types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination are provided: “7R time-short one-time jackpot”, “7R time-short five-time jackpot”, and “7R-time-short 100 hits”. (See FIG. 6C).

When it becomes “7R one time jackpot”, a jackpot game including seven long open round games in which the big winning opening 13 is long opened is executed, and after this jackpot game ends, one second special symbol determination is performed. The game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the change display of the second special symbol according to the above is completed.
Until the big hit game of 7R ends, the game is controlled in the normal game state. For this reason, the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved even though the player is right-handed during the big hit game, and the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved at the end of the big hit game. Then, the first special symbol determination and the change display of the first special symbol are performed. In this case, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified using three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display region 53 without displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display region 50 (see FIG. 23). You.

  On the other hand, when the big hit game ends, the game is controlled in the time saving game state, so that the player can easily make the second starting port 12 win the game ball by right-handing because the game is controlled. . When the game ball wins the second starting port 12 and both the right for the first special symbol determination and the right for the second special symbol determination are held, the first special symbol is obtained. The right relating to the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the right relating to the determination.

  When the gaming ball has won the second starting port 12 after the big hit game has ended, a second special symbol determination for determining whether or not a small hit (or a big hit) is performed, and a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Is selected, but in this case, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively long (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 130 seconds) is always selected. For this reason, during the period in which the second special symbol is variably displayed (for example, for 130 seconds) after the 7R jackpot game is completed, the time-saving game state is continued, and the player is required to enter the gate 16 and the second starting port 12. It is possible to accumulate four right to judge the second special symbol by right-handing aiming at. For this reason, in the case of "7R time saving one big hit", five (= 1 times + 4 times) second special symbol determinations are executed after the 7R big hit game ends.

When it becomes "5 big hits in 7R time savings", a big hit game including seven long open round games in which the big winning opening 13 is long opened is executed, and after the big hit game ends, five second special symbol determinations are performed. The game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the change display of the second special symbol according to the above is completed.
After the big hit game of 7R is completed, five second special symbol determinations for determining whether or not a small hit (or a big hit) are performed. However, when the fifth second special symbol determination is performed, As in the case of the above one time saving, the variation pattern of the second special symbol may have a relatively long variation time. For this reason, the time saving game state will continue until the period (for example, 130 seconds) in which the second special symbol is variably displayed after the end of the 7R jackpot game is completed, and the player will be able to use the gate 16 and the gate 16 By performing right-handed aiming at the second starting opening 12, it is possible to accumulate four rights for the second special symbol determination.
For this reason, in the case of “5R big hits in 7R time savings”, 9 (= 5 + 4) second special symbol determinations are executed after the 7R big hit game ends.

  On the other hand, when "7R time savings 100 times big hit" is reached, a big hit game including seven long open round games for long opening of the special winning opening 13 is executed, and after the big hit game ends, 100 second special games are executed. The time-saving game state continues until the symbol determination is performed. As described above, when the number of time savings is set to 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short as 1.5 seconds is selected. Then, since the small hit probability related to the second special symbol determination is 1 / 7.5 (= 40/300: see FIG. 6B), if the number of time savings is set to 100, the big hit There is a feature that small hits are likely to occur in a short time after the game is over.

As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment always transitions to the time saving game state, and performs five times (= The second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed nine times (= one time saving + four holdings), nine times (= five time savings + four holdings), or 100 times.
Here, even when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, after the big hit game according to the current big hit ends, the game is controlled again in the time saving game state (FIG. 5).

By the way, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the type of the small hit is “4R time reduction 5 times small hit” and “12R time reduction 5 times small” illustrated in FIG. 6D. Win "and" 16R time saving 100 times small hit ". That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the number of time savings is set to 5 or 100.
On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, if the type of the big hit is determined to be “7R time-saving one-time big hit” (see FIG. 6C), the time-saving will be reduced. Since it is given only once, the player is disadvantaged compared to the case where the small hit is allocated, despite the fact that the small hit is allocated to the second special symbol judgment having a lower probability than the small hit of 1/300. There is a possibility that the problem of becoming a problem may occur.

  For this reason, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, one time-saving big hit can be selected, while the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “ In the case of "big hit", a configuration in which one time-saving big hit is not selected may be adopted. Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6C is used as a symbol determination table dedicated to the first special symbol determination, and a second special symbol determination table is referred to by referring to a symbol determination table different from this symbol determination table. As an example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of the jackpot according to the symbol determination is determined to be one of “4R 5 time jackpots”, “12R 5 time jackpots” and “16R 100 time jackpots”. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (two kinds), a small hit game including an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is performed. This open game is the same as described above with reference to FIG. 2, but if the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of the small hit game, a V win is achieved, and the small hit game is followed by the big hit game. Is executed, and after the big hit game ends, the game is controlled again in the time saving game state (see FIG. 5).

When the result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, a big hit game using the big win port 13 is executed for all round games from the first round to the last round, and the big hit game ends. After that, the game is controlled again in the time saving game state (see FIG. 5).
On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the small hit game is executed using the small winning opening 19. Here, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small winning game and wins the V, the big winning game that completes the round game of the second and subsequent rounds is executed using the large winning opening 13. . Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game is controlled in the time saving game state (see FIG. 5). However, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hitting game (no V winning), the round game after the second round is not performed, and after the small hitting game, The game is controlled in the normal game state (see FIG. 5).

  In addition, even if the second special symbol determination of the set number of time savings is performed and the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit or a big hit, the gaming state shifts from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Will do. Also, when the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination executed in the time saving game state reaches the specified number, the game state shifts from the time saving game state to the normal game state. . Note that the end conditions related to these time-saving gaming states will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Explanation of judgment method using random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of a determination using a random number executed by the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 14) of the game control board 100. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for describing various tables stored in the main ROM 102 and used for special symbol determination. In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, an example will be described in which the range of each random number is considerably smaller than the actual range and each random number stored in the main ROM 102 is stored as a continuous value. .

  FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram for describing the big hit determination table used for the first special symbol determination. The jackpot random number shown in FIG. 6A is a random number used for the first special symbol determination executed when the game ball has won the first starting port 11. In the present embodiment, the possible range of the jackpot random number is "0" to "299", whereas one random number value "0" is stored as the jackpot winning value, and 299 non-winning values are stored. Random numbers “1” to “299” are stored. For this reason, the probability that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state is a big hit is 1/300.

  FIG. 6B is an explanatory diagram for describing the big hit determination table used for the second special symbol determination. The jackpot random number shown in FIG. 6 (B) is a random number used for the second special symbol determination which is executed when the game ball has won the second starting port 12. In the present embodiment, the possible range of the jackpot random number is “0” to “299”, whereas one random number value “0” is stored as the jackpot winning value, and 40 as the small jackpot winning value. The random number values “1” to “40” are stored, and the 259 random number values “41” to “299” are stored as non-winning values. For this reason, the probability of a large hit in the result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is 1/300, whereas the probability of a small hit is 1 / 7.5 (= 40 / 300).

That is, in the case of the above "7R one time jackpot", a small jackpot of 1 / 7.5 is allocated in any of the five special symbol determinations (= one time + four times of holding). Therefore, the continuation rate of the time-saving gaming state is about 51.1%.
Also, in the case of the above-mentioned "7R time saving 5 times big hit", a small hit of 1 / 7.5 is allocated in any of 9 times (= 5 times + 4 times of holding) 2nd special symbol judgment. Therefore, the continuation rate of the time-saving gaming state is further increased to about 72.4%.
Also, when the above-mentioned "7R time saving 100 times big hit" is reached, a small hit of 1 / 7.5 may be allocated in any of the 100 second special symbol determinations. Will be even higher.

  Note that a probability setting switch that can be set to any one of setting 1 to setting 6 is provided on the game control board 100, and the jackpot probability (the probability of one type of jackpot illustrated in FIG. 5) can be changed depending on the setting. May be adopted. In this case, for example, if the setting is set to 1, the jackpot probability becomes 1/300, if the setting is 2, the jackpot probability becomes 1/290, if the setting is 3, the jackpot probability becomes 1/280, and if the setting is 4, the jackpot probability is set. A configuration in which the probability is 1/270, the big hit probability is 1/260 when set to setting 5, and the big hit probability is 1/250 when set to 6 is given as an example.

  However, although the probability per type is changed depending on the setting, it is preferable not to change the probability per two types (ie, small hits). As described above, by not changing the probability per type, it is possible to suppress a change in the continuation rate of the time-saving gaming state when the setting related to the probability per type is changed. A large change in performance can be prevented.

  FIG. 6 (C) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a symbol determination table which is referred to when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, to determine the type of the big hit.

  If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, or if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. Is done. The types of the jackpots are the above-described three types of “7R time-short one-time jackpot”, “7R time-short five-time jackpot”, and “7R time-short 100 hits”.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 6 (C), in the symbol determination table at the time of the big hit, the possible range of the big hit symbol random number is 100 from “0” to “99”. 85 random numbers of “0” to “84” are associated with “7R time-saving one-time jackpot”, and 14 random numbers of “85” to “98” with “7R time-saving five-time jackpot” Numerical values are associated, and one random number value of “99” is associated with “100 big hits in 7R time savings”.
For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is a big hit, it is determined to be "7R time savings one big hit" at a rate of 85/100 (= 85%), A ratio of 14/100 (= 14%) is determined as “7R time savings 5 big hits”, and a ratio of 1/100 (= 1%) is determined as “7R time savings 100 times big hit”.

  FIG. 6 (D) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a symbol determination table which is referred to when the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit and which determines the type of the small hit.

  When the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the type of the small hit is determined based on the small hit symbol random number acquired together with the big hit random number and the like. The types of the small hits are three types of “4R, 5 times of small hits”, “12R, 5 times of small hits” and “16R, 100 times of small hits”.

  When it becomes "5 small wins in 4R hours", a small hit game including an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is executed. If the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during this open game, the small hit game is executed. Subsequently, a jackpot game including three long opening round games (= 4 times—one opening game) for long opening of the special winning opening 13 (round games from the second round to the last round) is executed. Then, after the big hit game is executed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the change display of the second special symbol according to the second special symbol determination of five times ends.

  In the case of "5 small hits in 12R hours", the number of long open round games executed after the small hit game is 11 instead of 3 (= 12 times-1 open game). This is the same as in the case of "4R time savings, 5 small hits", except that

  In addition, when these “5R small hits for 4R time savings” and “5 small hits for 12R time savings”, the second special symbol is used as the variation pattern of the second special symbol according to the fifth special symbol determination. Since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is relatively long (for example, 130 seconds), the right to determine the second special symbol can be up to four during the fifth change display of the second special symbol. It is possible to store.

  On the other hand, when the game reaches “16R small hit 100 times small hit”, a small hit game including an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is executed, and when a game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game, a small hit is achieved. Following the game, a jackpot game including a long open round game (2 rounds to a final round round game) in which the large winning opening 13 is long opened (= 16 times-one open game) is executed. Then, after the jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the second special symbol determination is executed 100 times.

In the present embodiment, as exemplified in FIG. 6D, in the symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, the possible range of the small hit symbol random number is 100 from "0" to "99". Thus, 35 random numbers of “0” to “34” are associated with “5 small hits of 4R time savings”, and “35” to “89” of “5 small hits of 12R time savings”. 55 random numbers are associated with each other, and ten random numbers “90” to “99” are associated with “100 small hits per 16R time savings”.
For this reason, when the second determination result is a small hit, it is determined to be “5 small hits for 4R time savings 5 times” at a rate of 35/100 (= 35%), and 55/100 (= 55%). The ratio is determined to be "12R time reduction 5 times big hit", and the ratio is determined to be 10/100 (= 10%) "16R time reduction 100 times small hit".

  In addition, when the slide member 17 is operated in the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the losing probability, the probability of selecting various types of big hits, the probability of selecting various small hits, and the normal symbol determination described in the above description. The probability of determination, the change time of the ordinary symbol, the operation time of the slide member 17 and the like are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other numerical values may be used.

[Screen Configuration Example of Liquid Crystal Screen 5 in Normal Game State]
FIG. 7 is a screen diagram illustrating a screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the normal gaming state. When the game is being controlled in the normal game state described above, as illustrated in FIG. 53 are formed.

  During the special symbol change display, the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 and the like and the small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are shaken on the spot without completely stopping. There may be slight movement. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are also completely stopped. For this reason, in the following description, the state in which the decorative symbols and small symbols are completely stopped is called "final stop", and the term "simulated" in which the decorative symbols and small symbols continue to slightly move on the spot without completely stopping. The term "stop" shall be used to clearly distinguish the two.

<About the decorative design display area 50 and the decorative design>
The decorative symbol display area 50 is a display area in which a decorative symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol determination is displayed. In the state where the special symbol is stopped, in the decorative symbol display area 50, for example, a part of the symbol column of the decorative symbol consisting of a number of numbers 1 to 9 continuously written vertically from bottom to top. Are permanently stopped so that three are arranged in the horizontal direction (for example, see FIG. 9A). In this situation, for example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and in response thereto, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are started (for example, FIG. 9B). Then, at the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the three special symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and the first special symbol for reporting the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Are stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols are permanently stopped.

The decorative pattern has the following features.
That is, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in a manner to notify the result of the special symbol determination a predetermined time before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol determination is stopped along with the special symbol being stopped and displayed. There is a feature that the actual stop is performed in such a manner as to notify the determination result.

  Further, the decorative symbol has a feature that it may be in a non-display state during the variable display of the special symbol, for example, during SPSP reach or story reach described later.

  In addition, the decorative symbol is basically halted after being pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the result of the special symbol judgment, but as an exception, there is a case where the decorative symbol is completely stopped without simulated stop. Specifically, when the number of times reduced after the end of the jackpot game is set to 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. While the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed for 1.5 seconds, scroll display of each symbol row is continued without pseudo stop of the decorative symbol.

  Also, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation when the number of time savings is set to one, the decorative symbol is not displayed after the reach is established (FIGS. 27B to 28G, FIG. 28). (Refer to (A)), when the result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation is "small hit", it is displayed again in a form indicating the small hit (see FIG. 28 (C)). On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation is “losing”, the decorative symbol remains hidden even after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has been completed since the reach was established. With the stop display of the second special symbol, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by three small symbols (see FIGS. 28 (A), (E), and (F)). The same applies to the variable display of the second special symbol in the fifth rotation when the number of times of saving is set to one.

Further, when the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first time saving rotation is exhausted, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing”, The decorative symbols are not displayed during the variable display of the second special symbols and during the period from when the second special symbols are stopped until the finalized time elapses (FIGS. 28 (G) to (H), FIGS. 29 (A) to (H)). F)). On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, three decorative symbols in a mode of notifying the small hit before the end of the variation display of the second special symbol. As the variable display is started and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols are permanently stopped (see FIGS. 25 (B), 30 (G) and (H)). In addition, a symbol promotion effect using the decorative symbols may be performed between the start of the variable display of the three decorative symbols and the final stop of the three decorative symbols.
Note that the same applies to the case where the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at the fifth rotation of the time saving when the number of time savings is set to 5 is exhausted. It is.

  In the following description, the effect performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 including the decorative symbol variable display may be referred to as “variable effect”. The decorative symbol displayed in the left column of the three symbol columns is referred to as “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle column is referred to as “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right column is referred to as “right symbol”. It may be called a "pattern."

<About small design display area 53 and small design>
The small symbol display area 53 is a display area in which three small symbols indicating whether the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner are displayed, and a decoration in which a decorative symbol is displayed. This is a display area smaller than the symbol display area 50. In the small symbol display area 53, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variable display of the three small symbols of the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol is started (for example, FIG. 10 (A) and (B)). Then, as the special symbol and the decorative symbol are permanently stopped, the three small symbols are permanently stopped in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (for example, see FIG. 12 (F)).

  The small symbol differs from the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 in the following points. That is, in the decorative design, a number of numbers 1 to 9 are sequentially arranged vertically from bottom to top, and a part of the design sequence is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Thus, three columns are displayed in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the small design is a design in which three small designs, a left small design, a medium small design, and a right small design, are arranged in one horizontal row. When viewed from above as an axial direction, for example, by rotating counterclockwise, each small figure is arranged in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2,. The number indicated by changes. That is, each small figure is different from the decorative design in that the display position does not substantially change.

  In addition, for the decorative symbols, for example, the display area may be changed from the decorative symbol display area 50 due to the development of the reach effect (for example, see FIGS. 10 (E) and (F)). Does not change its display area from the small symbol display area 53.

  Although not shown in the figure, each decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is configured as a highly decorative symbol in which a character unique to the numeral is added to the numeral. On the other hand, the small design is different from the decorative design in that it is a design with low decorativeness composed only of numbers.

Further, the decorative symbol may not be displayed during a predetermined period except when the variable display of the special symbol starts and ends (for example, see FIG. 11D). Also, as illustrated in FIGS. 28 (E) to (H), FIGS. 29 (A) to (F), and FIGS. 30 (C) to (F), the special symbol change display is started and then ended. May not be displayed at all.
On the other hand, the small symbol is different from the decorative symbol in that the small symbol is not hidden during the special symbol change display and the special symbol stop display.

Also, in the full rotation effect performed using the decorative symbols, three decorative symbols may be synchronized, and in the full rotation effect, the decorative symbols in each column such as “111”, “222”, and “333” are aligned. Each symbol row is scroll-displayed in the state of being put.
On the other hand, the left small symbol, the middle and small symbol, and the right small symbol have a feature that they are not synchronized except during the full rotation effect. Specifically, when these three small symbols are rotating at high speed, there is a feature that each small symbol does not show the same number at the same time.

  In the normal gaming state, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and no reach effect is performed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol is determined by the first special symbol determination. After the pseudo stop in the mode indicating the determination result of the above, the main stop is performed with the stop display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed from the start to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and finally stop with the stop display of the first special symbol. The same applies to the case where the reach effect is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, but the reach effect has low jackpot reliability, for example, normal reach or SP reach.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", at the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the big hit, Similarly, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing a big hit (see, for example, FIG. 9F).

  In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol, if the development of a reach effect with a high jackpot reliability such as SPSP reach or story reach is developed, the decorative symbol is hidden and the left small symbol of the three small symbols is displayed. The right symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped in the reach mode, and only the small symbol continues to rotate at high speed.

  In addition, when the number of time savings is set to 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1.5 seconds is selected. Therefore, when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the 1.5 second variation pattern and then stopped and displayed, similarly to the decorative symbol, the small symbol is pseudo-stopped during the variation display of the second special symbol. First, the small symbol is permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol.

  Also, when the number of time savings is set to 1 or 5 times, when the hold related to the second special symbol determination accumulated during the final change in the time saving game state is consumed after shifting to the normal game state. Selects a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 second as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. For this reason, when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the 1 second variation pattern and then stopped and displayed, the small symbol does not pseudo stop during the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is not displayed. Along with the stop display, the small symbols are permanently stopped (for example, see FIG. 25C). When the determination result of the held second special symbol determination is “losing”, the decorative symbol is not displayed between the time when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the time when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. (See FIGS. 28 (G) to (H) and FIGS. 29 (A) to (F)).

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the held second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the second special symbol is displayed between the time when the second special symbol is variably displayed and the time when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. After the decorative symbol (and the small symbol) indicating the determination result of the determination is pseudo-stopped, these decorative symbols (and the small symbol) are permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol (FIG. 25B). (See FIGS. 30 (G) to (H)).

The decorative design and the small design have the following common features.
That is, when the numbers indicated by the small symbols and the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols are the same, there is a feature that the colors of these small symbols and the decorative symbols are also common. For example, if one symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is light blue, two symbols to be displayed next are blue, and three symbols to be displayed next are purple, The symbol is displayed in light blue when the small symbol indicates 1, is displayed in blue when the small symbol indicates 2, and is displayed in purple when the small symbol indicates 3. Therefore, the color of each of the small symbols (the small left symbol, the small and medium symbol, and the right small symbol) changes each time the number indicated by the rotation is switched.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 7, when the player makes a left-handed hit while the game is controlled in the normal game state and the game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the acquired information obtained in accordance with the winning is obtained. The first special symbol determination is performed based on the (big hit random number or the like), and the first special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the following effects are performed.

  That is, first, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started so that the three symbol columns composed of a plurality of decorative symbols scroll from top to bottom, Three small symbols start rotating at a high speed (for example, see FIGS. 10A and 10B). In the following description, the effect performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 including the decorative symbol variable display may be referred to as “variable effect”.

  Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of scrolling, prior to the full stop of all the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the left column, is pseudo-stopped, and the right symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the right column, Also simulates a stop. As described above, when the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo stopped, if these decorative symbols are not the same symbol, the reach is not established, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”. Three decorative symbols (for example, “254”) informing that there is a pseudo stop on the active line, and the pseudo stop is performed with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating “losing”. The three decorative patterns are finally stopped. In this case, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and show the same numbers as the three decorative symbols with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating “losing”. In this mode, the main stop is performed simultaneously with the three decorative symbols.

When the effect without reach is performed in this way, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed basically without pseudo stop during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (for example, FIG. 9B). And (C)), along with the stop display of the first special symbol, the final stop is performed so as to show the same number as the three decorative symbols (see, for example, FIG. 12 (H)).
However, during SPSP reach or story reach, which will be described later, there is a period during which no decorative symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and during this period, three small symbols are halted in the reach mode (for example, FIG. )reference).

  When the same decorative symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50, the reach is established (for example, see FIG. 10C). When the reach is established in this way, a reach effect that gives the player an expectation that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol (the left symbol and the right symbol) will stop in the middle row as a middle symbol and the symbols will be aligned. Is performed. When the reach is established, the three small symbols continue to rotate at a high speed (see, for example, FIG. 9C). When the reach reaches the normal reach or the SP reach, the three small symbols continue to rotate at a high speed. , During SPSP reach or story reach, the three small symbols simulate stop in the reach mode.

  Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed when the first special symbol variation display is started is “losing”, the reach effect is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the first special symbol variation display. Is performed, and three decorative symbols indicating reach reach eyes (for example, “343”) are pseudo-stopped to notify a loss, and these three decorative symbols (and three small symbols) are displayed with the stop display of the first special symbol. ) Stops. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the above-mentioned irregularities are pseudo-stopped, and are permanently stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not to be executed, a “losing notification effect” is performed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a loss and then permanently stopped to report the loss.

  If this losing notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the change display of the first special symbol are immediately started. You.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, a reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a mode indicating a big hit (for example, “333” or “777”). At (eye), the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped, and finally stop with the stop display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in the same manner as indicating the big hit so as to synchronize with the three decorative symbols (see FIG. 9 (F)). Stop with two decorations. As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, a “hit notification effect” is executed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the jackpot and then finally stopped to notify the jackpot. When the hit notification effect is executed, a big hit game is executed.

<Hold icon display area 51>
The reserved icon display area 51 is an area where a reserved icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is reserved is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 in a situation where the special symbol determination and the special symbol variation display cannot be started immediately, such as during the special symbol change display or the jackpot game, the first special The right of symbol determination is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

  As described above, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the same number of reserved icons as the reserved number of the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol reserved display 43 is displayed in the first reserved area 51. Is done. FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which four holding icons are displayed in the holding icon display area 51 to indicate that the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is the maximum “4”. In FIG. 7, in order to easily understand the order in which the hold icons are displayed, a number is attached to each hold icon. However, actually, a hold icon that does not include a number is displayed.

  In addition, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the game ball does not basically win the second starting port 12, and therefore, the right of the second special symbol determination is not suspended, There is no display of the hold icon related to the second special symbol determination on the liquid crystal screen 5, and no display area for displaying the hold icon is formed. Further, when the game is being controlled in the time-saving game state, the right of the second special symbol determination is held, but the holding icon corresponding to the holding is not displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to distinguish between the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination and the hold icon related to the second special symbol determination. In the following description, the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination (hold icon display area 51) (The hold icon displayed in) is simply referred to as a “hold icon”.

(About the change of the display mode of the hold icon)
By the way, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white hold icon. On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51, an effect of changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the hold icon may be performed. When this effect is performed, the white suspension icon changes to a suspension icon of a color indicating a jackpot reliability, such as blue, green, red, or gold. The colors exemplified here are arranged in ascending order of the jackpot reliability. Gold and red are easy to select in the case of a big hit, but are hard to be selected in the case of a loss, and are easy to be selected when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time. Green is likely to be selected when a "big hit" or "losing" but a special symbol is set to a medium variation time. Blue is easily selected when it is "losing" or when it is "losing" and the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time.

  In the present embodiment, the gold icon (see FIG. 16E) will be described by taking as an example a case where the display color and shape are different from those of other display colors. Also, here, the case where the display color of the hold icon changes once has been described as an example. For example, a white hold icon changes to a blue hold icon, and this blue hold icon later changes to a red hold icon. An effect of changing the display color of one hold icon a plurality of times, such as changing, may be performed. Also, here, the case where the display color of the hold icon, which was white when the display of the hold icon was started, changes to another display color, but the display color of the newly displayed hold icon is changed from the beginning. The display color may be another display color different from white, and an effect of changing the display color of the hold icon of another display color may be performed.

  So far, the effect of changing the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 has been described, but the same effect may be performed on the icon displayed in the area 52 described later. .

In the present embodiment, the effect of changing the display mode of the icon (the hold icon or the icon) includes the effect of changing the display color of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 14C to 14H), the display color of the icon, The effect of changing the shape (for example, see FIGS. 15 (H) and 16 (A) to 16 (E)) will be described.
However, the effect of changing the display mode of the icon only needs to change at least one of the display color, the shape, and the size of the hold icon (or the icon). The effect of changing only the size of the icon or the effect of changing the shape and size of the hold icon or the icon (without changing the display color) may be used.

<About the area 52>
The icon display area 52 (hereinafter abbreviated as “the area 52”) is an area for displaying the icon as a change suggestion image indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a change state. The icon is displayed in the area 52 along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, the icon is deleted from the area 52 at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the timing for deleting the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be deleted during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, it is conceivable to delete the icon at the time of SPSP reach development or story reach development.

  The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (the hold icon including the number “1” closest to the area 52: see FIG. 7) is executed. With the start of the change display of the first special symbol, the hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as the icon. At this time, if other holding icons are displayed in the holding icon display area 51, those holding icons are shifted in the holding icon display area 51 in a direction approaching the area 52.

[Flow of effects associated with the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach effect. When the first special symbol determination is performed by the main CPU 101, the first special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIG. 7) is started with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 8A). The start of the variable display of the decorative symbol is as described above with reference to FIG.

  When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, three decorative symbols (for example, irregularities) indicating the loss are displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 without reaching during the variable display of the first special symbol. After stopping the game, there is a case where a hit-reporting effect of stopping the three decorative symbols is performed with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the loss (see FIG. 8B).

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (based on the reach random number). During the fluctuation display of one special symbol, the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the activated line, and reach is established (see FIG. 8C). When the reach is established in this way, a predetermined symbol that enhances the player's expectation that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) is stopped on the active line as a middle symbol and the symbols are aligned is obtained. Reach production is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as reach effects that can be executed with the change display of the first special symbol, a normal reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal reach”), an SP reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as “SP reach”), a SPSP reach There are four types of reach productions: a production (hereinafter abbreviated as “SPSP reach”) and a story reach production (hereinafter abbreviated as “story reach”).

  The normal reach (see FIG. 8D) is a reach effect with a relatively low jackpot reliability (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). As the reach reaches the normal reach from the established reach, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row that has been scrolled and displayed at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) gradually decreases. Here, at the start of the first special symbol change display, a change pattern of the first special symbol (for example, a change pattern having a change time of 15 seconds) is relatively short as the change pattern of the first special symbol. When selected, the following variable effects are performed.

  If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line as a middle symbol, and then the same three decorative symbols on the activated line (for example, “777”) , Etc.) (see FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line as a middle symbol, and then three decorative symbols on the activated line (for example, “787”) ”And the like (see FIG. 8 (B)).

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a relatively long variation time, the scroll pattern of the middle symbol row is displayed in the normal reach even after the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol passes on the active line. It continues to develop into SP reach (see FIG. 8 (E)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 8 (F)). In the present embodiment, these reach effects indicate whether or not a hero character (hereinafter, abbreviated as “hero character”) and an enemy character (hereinafter, abbreviated as “enemy character”) win or lose in a battle. It is configured as a reach production.

  SP Reach and SPSP Reach are positioned such that SP Reach is in the first half of the battle and SPSP Reach is in the second half of the battle. The fighting enemy characters are common between the first half of the battle and the second half of the battle. That is, for example, when the battle with the enemy character A is developed in the SP reach in the first half of the battle, the battle with the same enemy character A is also developed in the SPSP reach in the second half of the battle.

  In addition, when comparing SP reach and SPSP reach, SPSP reach has higher jackpot reliability than SP reach, and a hit at the end of SPSP reach is compared with a case where a hit is reported at the end of SP reach. Is more likely to be reported (easily winning the battle with the enemy character).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, when SPSP reach is performed, normal reach reaches SPSP reach via SP reach, and normal reach reaches SPSP reach without passing through SP reach. There are times when you do.

  On the other hand, the story reach (see FIG. 8 (G)) is an effect in which a specific story is developed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and whether the end of the story is a predetermined end or not is a big hit. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when four types of reach effects are compared, there is a case where the jackpot reliability of the story reach is highest and the story reach directly develops from the normal reach to the story reach, and a case where the story reach develops from the SP reach.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the normal reach is one type will be described. However, as the normal reach, a short reach with a short effect execution time and a long reach with a long effect execution time as compared with the short reach can be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the reach can be developed into SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach, while the short reach does not develop into these three types of reach effects.

  Further, the types of reach effects and the manner of development of the reach effects illustrated in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the types of reach effects and the manner of development may be other.

[Relationship between decorative design and small design]
Next, the relationship between the decorative design and the small design will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9 is a screen diagram for explaining the relationship between the decorative symbol and the small symbol.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9A, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, when the three decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 50 are fully stopped, the small symbol display area 53 is displayed. Are completely stopped so that the three small symbols displayed in the table indicate the same numbers as the three decorative symbols. That is, for example, when two symbols are left as a left symbol, eight symbols as a middle symbol, and five symbols as a right symbol are fully stopped, a small left symbol indicating 2 and a small symbol indicating 8 and a right small symbol indicating 5 are displayed. Are completely stopped (see FIG. 9A).

  FIG. 9B illustrates a state immediately after scroll display of three symbol rows in the decorative symbol display area 50 has started. As described above, immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started, the scroll speed is high, and it is difficult to identify the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50. As described above, in a situation where the three symbol rows are scrolling at high speed, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 rotate at high speed at a speed that makes it difficult to identify the numbers indicated by each small symbol. For this reason, the player can recognize that the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are being changed and displayed based on the fact that the three small symbols are rotating at high speed.

In FIG. 9C, during the normal reach described above, the middle symbol row continues to perform high-speed scrolling in a state where the left two symbols and the right two symbols are pseudo stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50 as the reach symbols. The situation is illustrated. At this time, each of the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 continues to rotate at a high speed.
Also, in FIG. 9D, during the above-described SP reach, the two left symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced and moved to the upper left, and the two right symbols are reduced to the upper right. , And a state where these reach symbols are pseudo-stopped in the display area after the movement. At this time, the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 are still rotating at a high speed.

  In this way, when the reach symbol is displayed, the player can easily grasp which decorative symbol has reached the reach based on the reach symbol, and at which symbol the reach is reached. It is not necessary to notify whether the condition is satisfied using small symbols. Therefore, during the normal reach and the SP reach, the three decorative symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 continue to rotate at a high speed as before the reach is established (see FIG. 9B) (FIG. 9B). (See (C) and (D)).

  On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 9 (E), during the SPSP reach or the story reach, the reach effect is achieved using the wider display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 including the area where the reach symbol is displayed during the SP reach. Since it is developed, the period during which the decorative design is not displayed becomes very long. On the other hand, if the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are rotated at a high speed, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the reach is established. For this reason, during the period in which the decorative symbol is not displayed during the SPSP reach or the story reach, the left symbol is displayed so as to indicate the same number as the reach symbol (for example, two symbols) displayed before the development of the reach effect. While the small figure and the right small design stop in a pseudo manner, the small and medium design continues to rotate at high speed (see FIG. 9E).

  As described above, since the left small symbol and the right small symbol indicate the same number as the reach symbol, the player can obtain two small symbols despite the fact that the reach symbol (the left symbol and the right symbol) is not displayed. , It is possible to easily specify which reach symbol has achieved the reach. In addition, since the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at a high speed, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner by watching the small and small symbols continue to rotate at a high speed. it can.

  In FIG. 9 (F), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, and at the end of any one of the four types of reach effects, a big hit is displayed (here, “222” An example is shown in which three decorative symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed in a double-eye pattern. As described above, when three decorative symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed in a manner indicating a big hit, three small symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed so as to indicate the same number as these decorative symbols (FIG. 9F). reference).

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case of "7R time-saving one-time jackpot", even-numbered eyes are permanently stopped as decorative symbols, and in the case of "7R time-saving five-time jackpot", decorative symbols other than 7 symbols are used. The combination of the decorative pattern that informs the type of jackpot and the jackpot is such that the odd number of double eyes are completely stopped, and in the case of "7R time savings 100 times big hit", the seven symbols of the double eyes are completely stopped as a decorative pattern. Are associated. Then, at the end of the reach production, after the pseudo stop display of the numbers of the numbers that do not correspond to the actual type of jackpot, the pseudo numbers are changed to the numbers corresponding to the type of the actual jackpot. There is a case where a symbol promotion effect relating to a decorative symbol, which is stopped after stopping, is performed (see FIG. 9 (G)).

  More specifically, for example, a first moving display is performed in which the slot of “222” illustrated in FIG. 9F moves to the far side of the liquid crystal screen 5 while decreasing (see FIG. 9G). After the first movement display, the second movement is to move a zoro eye (for example, “777”) having a different number from the zoro eye that has moved to the back side so as to protrude from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the near side. 2 is displayed (see FIG. 9H).

  Here, when the first moving display is being performed, the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 are likely to change to the back side of the liquid crystal screen 5 and have become smaller. Rotate at high speed (see FIG. 9G). In other words, when the symbol promotion effect is performed, the three small symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the double eyes start high-speed rotation again (see FIGS. 9F and 9G).

  On the other hand, if, for example, the slot of “222” changes to the slot of “777” due to the second movement display, the slot after the change does not further change. Become. For this reason, when the second moving display in which the changed zoro eyes pop out at the end of the symbol promotion effect is performed, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped so as to indicate the same number as the changed zoro eyes. (See FIG. 9H). Then, after the second moving display is performed, the three decorative symbols (here, the zigzag eyes) are pseudo-stopped and then fully stopped, so that the three small symbols (here, the same numerals) in the small symbol display area 53 are displayed. Pseudo stop, and then the actual stop so as to synchronize the doublet eyes.

  9 (G) and (H) illustrate an example in which a symbol promotion effect in which even-numbered zolo eyes are changed to “777” zoro is performed to notify “100 hits of 7R time savings 100 times”. However, in the case of notifying the “7R time-saving five-time jackpot”, the even-numbered zoro eyes change to odd-numbered zoro eyes other than 7 (for example, “333” or “555”), and the small symbol display area 53 The three small symbols also change to the same odd number in order to synchronize with this change.

  On the other hand, in the case of notifying "7R time saving one big hit", the first moving display and the second moving display in which even-numbered slots do not change to odd-numbered slots are performed. In this case, three small symbols (see FIG. 9 (F)) that have been pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating even-numbered slots (for example, “222”) are once rotated at high speed (see FIG. 9 (G)). ), The pseudo stop is performed again in the mode showing the same even number of the slot (for example, “222”) as before the start of the high-speed rotation.

  In addition, there is a case where a symbol promotion effect of changing a decorative symbol from an odd symbol other than the seven symbols to a seven symbol slot is performed. However, the slot before the change is not an even symbol but an odd symbol other than the seven symbols. Except for the symbols, the symbol promotion effect is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 7F to 7H, and thus detailed description is omitted.

<Specific examples of a series of productions that evolve into SPSP reach>
Next, specific examples of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 10 to 12 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of a series of effects that evolve into SPSP reach via SP reach.

  In FIG. 10 (A), in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon in the area 52 is “losing”, the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the same random pattern are permanently stopped. The illustrated state is illustrated. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, before the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, a variation 3 (here, “154”) is displayed. The two decorative symbols stop falsely. At that time, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the three decorative symbols indicating the ragged pattern are finally stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, the three small symbols that have been rotating at a high speed are completely stopped (without performing a false stop) in such a manner as to show the same irregularities (see FIG. 10A). FIG. 10A illustrates a state after the icon is deleted from the area 52 with the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, one second) elapses after these decorative symbols and small symbols have been stopped, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is performed. Be executed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a pending icon whose display mode (for example, display color) has been changed is displayed in the pending icon display area 51 as the earliest pending icon until the fixed time elapses ( As shown in FIG. 10 (A), the earliest pending icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as a new icon, the decorative symbol display area 50 is fluctuated, and the small symbol display area 53 is displayed. , The high-speed rotation of the small symbol is started (see FIGS. 10A and 10B). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10B, with the shift of the earliest holding icon, the remaining holding icons (here, one white holding icon) displayed in the holding icon display area 51 are changed to the corresponding icons. It shifts in a direction approaching the region 52.

  Here, when the variation display pattern of the effect with reach is set by the sub CPU 131 when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, for example, after the left symbol has been pseudo-stopped, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol. The symbol is pseudo stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 10 (C)). FIG. 10C illustrates a state in which reach is established in six symbols. As described above, when the same decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left and right columns as a reach symbol, for example, a reach line connecting these two reach symbols is superimposed on the reach symbol, and a voice such as "reach!" Output from the speaker 24.

  When the reach is established in this way, a normal reach that enhances the player's expectation that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol is permanently stopped on the pay line connecting the two reach symbols is performed (see FIG. 10D). . During the normal reach, three small symbols are still rotating at high speed. When the normal reach is developed, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row that has been scroll-displayed at a high speed gradually decreases (see FIGS. 10D and 10E).

  Here, when the variable display pattern that evolves from normal reach to SP reach is set when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the middle symbol row is scroll-displayed, the same middle symbol (6 symbols in this case) as the reach symbol passes through the active line (see FIG. 10 (E)) and is not shown in the figure. The scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row increases, and high-speed scrolling is restarted, so that it is difficult to identify the middle symbol displayed in the middle row. At this time, the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced while maintaining the reach state, and are respectively shifted to the upper left area and the upper right area of the liquid crystal screen 5. It moves (see FIGS. 10E and 10F).

  Next, a development suggestion effect is made to suggest that the main character and the enemy character will develop into the first half battle (see FIG. 10 (G)). More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10 (G), a production display in which a hero character performing a battle with an enemy character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed. Done.

  Subsequently, an enemy character appears from the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5, and an enemy character appearance effect that also moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed, and SP reach as a first half battle is started. (See FIG. 10H).

  When the enemy character appearance effect is performed, an effect display indicating that the hero character encounters the enemy character and is surprised is performed (see FIG. 11 (A)), and subsequently, the hero character and the enemy character attack and fight. A representative offense and defense effect is performed (see FIG. 11B). Here, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started this time, if the fluctuation effect pattern that evolves from the normal reach to the SP reach and informs the hit is set in the SP reach, the first half is set. In the battle, an effect display indicating a state of winning or losing is performed, and at the end of the SP reach, it is notified whether or not a big hit has occurred. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination of this time is a jackpot, after the effect display indicating that the main character defeats the enemy character is performed, After the decorative symbols and the small symbols of the Zoro eyes are pseudo-stopped, a final notification effect is performed. Also, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, after the effect display indicating that the main character is defeated by the enemy character is performed, the decorative symbol and the small symbol of the reach-losing eye are pseudo-stopped. After that, a losing notification effect, in which the game is permanently stopped, is performed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, a fluctuation effect pattern that evolves from the normal reach to the SPSP reach through the SP reach and notifies the hit is set in the SPSP reach is set. The following effect display is performed. More specifically, at the end of the SP Reach (first half battle), as a development effect suggesting that the battle between the protagonist character and the enemy character will not be settled and the game will evolve into the second half battle, the production role 7 is displayed on the LCD screen 5. It moves to a predetermined effecting position ahead, and at the effecting position, the effect combination 7 rotates while emitting light in a predetermined light emission pattern (see FIG. 11C). Along with this, an effect display is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, which shows a state in which light is emitted radially from the effect part 7.

  Subsequently, after the production character 7 returns to the initial position and a production display for displaying a solid white background image on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed, the hero character and the enemy character again confront each other and develop into a second half battle. An introduction effect of SPSP reach is performed, which suggests that the process is performed (see FIG. 11D). In this introductory production, the character of “VS enemy character A” indicating that a battle with enemy character A among a plurality of enemy characters is started, and the hero character's victory expectation for enemy character A by the number of stars The victory expectation suggestion display shown is performed (see FIG. 11D).

  In SPSP reach (the same applies to story reach), a reach effect is developed using a display area that is wider than normal reach or SP reach. Therefore, the hold icon display area 51 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the hold icon displayed on the hold icon display area 51 are deleted, and are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the liquid crystal screen 5. Reached symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are also erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 11B and 11D). With the development of SPSP reach and story reach, in addition to the reserved icon display area 51 and the reserved icon, the area 52 and the icons displayed in the area 52 may also be deleted from the liquid crystal screen 5. Good.

  Then, since it becomes impossible for the player to grasp which decorative symbol is reached based on the reach symbol, the left small symbol and the right small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are The pseudo stop is performed in a mode indicating the same number as the reach symbol (see FIG. 11D).

  As described above, when the SPSP reach as the second half battle is started, for example, an attack and defense effect showing that the hero character that has been attacked by the enemy character drops its weapon (long sword) and is attacked. (See FIG. 11E). Then, by displaying the state in which the beam emitted from the weapon (light gun) changed by the hero character is directed toward the enemy character, a stir effect that increases the player's expectation of winning the latter half of the battle is performed. (See FIG. 11F).

  Then, at the end of the SPSP reach, an operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 11 (G)). In this operation promoting effect, an effective period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set in advance. For example, a button image imitating the effect button 26 and a “press!” Prompting the player to operate the effect button 26 are displayed. Characters and a validity gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

  On the other hand, if the player operates the effect button 26 before the remaining time of the effective period becomes zero, or if the end of the effective period without operating the effect button 26 during the effective period, If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, an effect display indicating that the hero character is counterattacked by the enemy character without hitting the attack of the hero character and the hero character is defeated is performed, and the reach loss (for example, “676”) )), A false notification effect in which the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the pseudo symbol are pseudo-stopped and then completely stopped is performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, a staging display indicating that the attack of the hero character hits the enemy character and the enemy character is defeated is performed as a hit suggesting effect indicating the big hit. (See FIG. 11H). At this time, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 in the reach mode are pseudo-stopped in the mode showing the zigzag eyes (see FIGS. 11G and 11H). In the case where the hit suggestion effect is performed, a hit notification effect in which three decorative symbols indicating the zoro eyes are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped with the stop display of the large hit symbol as the first special symbol ( See FIG. 12).

  When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the period between the pseudo stop of the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the slotted eyes and the final stop is based on FIGS. 9 (F) to (H). The above-described symbol promotion effect is performed. FIG. 12 (A) illustrates a state in which the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the “6.6” slot are pseudo-stopped at the end of the SPSP reach.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the pseudo stop of these symbols is started, a symbol promotion effect is started. When the type of the jackpot according to the first special symbol determination of this time is “7R time savings 100 times jackpot”, the first moving display that moves to the far side of the liquid crystal screen 5 while the “6.6” slot is small is displayed. This is performed (see FIG. 12 (B)), and after the first movement display, the “777” zoro different from the zolo that has moved to the back side is projected from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front. Is performed (see FIG. 12C), the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the “777” slot are pseudo-stopped, and the first special symbol is “7R time saving 100 times big hit”. The decorative symbol and the small symbol are permanently stopped along with the stop display of the big hit symbol notifying that is (see FIG. 12 (D)).

  On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot according to the first special symbol determination this time is “7R time-saving five-time jackpot”, the player has moved to the back side following the first movement display illustrated in FIG. A second movement display is performed in which odd-numbered symbols (here, "333") other than the seven symbols different from the even-numbered symbols are moved so as to protrude from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front (FIG. 12). (Refer to (E)), the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the “333” slot are pseudo-stopped, and the big hit symbol notifying that “7R time-saving 5 times big hit” is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Accordingly, these decorative symbols and small symbols are completely stopped (see FIG. 12 (F)).

  In addition, when the type of the jackpot according to the first special symbol determination of this time is “7R time-saving one-time jackpot”, the player has moved to the back side following the first movement display illustrated in FIG. A second movement display is performed in which the same even number of eyes (here, “666”) is moved from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 so as to protrude toward the near side (see FIG. 12 (G)). As the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the zigzag of “666” are pseudo-stopped, and the big hit symbol notifying that “7R one time big hit” is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol and the small symbol are completely stopped (see FIG. 12 (H)).

[About icon change production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the effect using the hold icon (or the icon), the “hold icon change effect” for changing the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 and the hold icon It is possible to execute "the icon change effect" of changing the display color of the icon displayed with the start of the change of the first special symbol.

In the gaming machine 1, after performing a holding icon change effect of changing the display color of the holding icon, the icon changing the display color of the icon displayed with the start of the change of the first special symbol related to the holding icon The icon change effect may be performed in the first effect pattern in which the change effect is not performed.
In the gaming machine 1, the display color of the icon displayed along with the start of the change of the first special symbol related to the reserved icon is changed without performing the reserved icon change effect of changing the display color of the reserved icon. An icon change effect may be performed in the second effect pattern for performing the icon change effect.
Further, in the gaming machine 1, after performing the holding icon change effect of changing the display color of the holding icon, the display color of the icon displayed with the start of the change of the first special symbol related to the holding icon is changed. An icon change effect may be performed in the third effect pattern for performing the icon change effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to realize these icon change effects, at the timing when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 and the first special symbol determination is suspended, the following preliminary determination processing is performed. Is performed.

<Preliminary judgment processing>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 during the special symbol change display in the normal gaming state, the right of the first special symbol determination according to the winning is determined by a predetermined number. Up to (four in the present embodiment) can be reserved. As described above, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 and the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right to be reserved is a big hit and whether the reservation is completed. At this time, a pre-determination process is performed to determine which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol at a timing when the game ball has won the first starting port 11. This pre-determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

As described above, when the preliminary determination process related to the reserved first special symbol determination is performed, a reservation command including the preliminary determination information indicating the result of the preliminary determination process is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes, for example, the following process at the timing when the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination is received. That is, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect based on the advance determination information included in the received hold command. Then, when it is determined that the hold icon change effect is to be executed, the effect pattern of the hold icon change effect is determined. Specifically, when executing the hold icon change effect, it is determined which display color of the hold icon is to be displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (the initial display color), and the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51. The display color is finally changed during the display. Then, it is also determined what effect pattern to change the display color of the hold icon from the initial display color to the final display color. Then, these determination results are set in the sub-RAM 133 as setting information of the pending icon change effect, and an icon display command including this setting information is transmitted to the image sound control board 140, thereby realizing the hold icon change effect.

When executing the icon change effect in the third effect pattern, the sub CPU 131 is displayed along with the start of the change of the first special symbol related to the hold icon in which the hold icon change effect based on the setting information is performed. When performing the icon change effect of changing the display color of the icon, the following processing is also executed at the timing when the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 determines the display color of the icon displayed in the area 52 based on the setting information related to the pending icon change effect. For example, when the pending icon finally changes to a green pending icon while being displayed in the pending icon display area 51, the display color of the icon displayed in the area 52 (the initial display color) is green. To decide. In addition, the final display color of the icon is determined based on the preliminary determination information included in the received hold command, and the effect pattern is changed from the initial display color to the final display color in any effect pattern. It is also determined whether to change the display color of.
Then, the sub CPU 131 sets these determination results in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the icon change effect, and transmits a variable effect start command including the setting information to the image and sound control board 140, thereby setting the icon change effect. To realize.

  Further, when executing the icon change effect in the second effect pattern, the sub CPU 131 executes the process related to the icon change effect without executing the process related to the reserved icon change effect. Specifically, when the holding icon change effect using the holding icon is not executed, the white holding icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as the icon. Therefore, the sub CPU 131 determines the initial display color of the icon to be white. Then, the final display color of the icon is determined based on the pre-determination information received in advance, and the display color of the icon is changed in any effect pattern from the initial display color to the final display color. Is also determined.

Note that the result of the preliminary determination processing (prior determination information) performed at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 and the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved is the retained first special symbol determination. The result of the jackpot determination process (see steps S309 and FIG. 40 in FIG. 39) and the result of the variation pattern selection process (see steps S310 and FIG. 41 in FIG. 39) performed when the right is exhausted.
For this reason, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect pattern of the icon change effect based on the result of the jackpot determination process and the result of the change pattern selection process with respect to the icon change effect. You may make it.

[Flow of the icon production]
Next, the flow of the icon effect performed using the icon will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a flow of the icon effect performed using the icon.

  When it is determined by the sub CPU 131 to perform the icon change effect described above, that is, when it is determined to change the display color of the icon, the icon illustrated in FIG. One of a successful change effect (see FIG. 13A), a successful icon change effect (see FIG. 13E), and a successful upper icon change effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed. In the present embodiment, the icon change success effect of changing the display color of the icon is achieved by throwing an item of a predetermined color possessed by an ally character (a character imitating a snowman) which is an ally of the hero character, and A description will be given of a case where the display is configured as an effect of an effect content (effect pattern) in which the display color of the icon is changed to the same color as the hit item (for example, see FIGS. 14C to 14H). .

In addition, as the effect contents of the icon change effect, in addition to the above-mentioned character changing the display color of the icon by throwing an item, the display color of the icon at a predetermined timing (for example, timing of developing into SP reach). Are automatically changed, and the display color of the icon changes in response to the display of a character (or design) indicating that the icon changes. On the other hand, for example, when performing the icon change success effect shown in FIG. 13A, the sub CPU 131 determines which effect content the icon change success effect is to be performed on by using the icon corresponding to the icon used for the icon change success effect. (1) When the variable display of the special symbol is started, it is determined by, for example, a lottery using random numbers.
In addition, there are a plurality of execution timings of the icon change effect, and when executing the icon change effect, the icon change effect is performed at least one of the plurality of execution timings.

  FIG. 13 illustrates a case where the icon change success effect of FIG. 13 (A) is performed once during one change display of the first special symbol, but this icon change success effect is performed a plurality of times. You may be asked. For example, if the initial display color of the icon is set to white and the final display color of the icon is set to red, the first icon change success of changing the display color of the icon from white to green An effect is performed, and further, a second icon change successful effect of changing the display color of the icon from green to red may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in advance at the time of winning the first starting opening that the icon change effect is not to be executed, the sub CPU 131 sets the first special symbol corresponding to the icon and starts changing the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not to perform an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) indicating a state in which the display color of the icon has failed to be changed between the start and the end of the change display of the special symbol. For example, it is determined by a lottery using random numbers, and based on the result of the determination, an icon change failure effect is executed.

  An icon change success effect of throwing an item of a predetermined color possessed by an ally character to hit the icon and changing the display color of the icon to the same color as the hit item (see FIG. 13A) , As an icon change failure effect, the player throws an item of a predetermined color possessed by an ally character but cannot hit the icon, and as a result, an effect in which the display color of the icon does not change is performed. (See FIG. 15A).

  As described above, when the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) is not performed, the icon failure effect (see FIG. 13B) of the effect content corresponding to the icon change success effect is changed at a fixed rate (see FIG. 13B). By performing at 10%, for example, it is possible to make the player expect that the icon change success effect will be performed even when the period during which the icon change success effect is not performed is long.

In addition, regarding the display color of the icon, for example, it is conceivable to employ a plurality of configurations as described below. That is, in the first configuration, in a part of the case where the preliminary determination result indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be performed at the variation start is selected at the start of the variation is obtained. In this configuration, an icon change success effect of finally changing the display color of the icon to blue or more (blue, green, red, or gold) is executed.
In the second configuration, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, in which the reach effect eventually develops beyond the SP reach (SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach) due to the fluctuation, is selected at the start of the fluctuation. In a part of the case where a preliminary determination result indicating that the icon is obtained is obtained, an icon change success effect of finally changing the display color of the icon to green or more (green, red, or gold) is executed.
In the third configuration, a advance pattern indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol, which will eventually lead to the reach effect beyond the SPSP reach (SPSP reach or story reach) due to the variation, is selected at the start of the variation. In a part of the case where the determination result is obtained, an icon change success effect of finally changing the display color of the icon to red or more (red or gold) is executed.
In the fourth configuration, in a case where a preliminary determination result indicating that a variation pattern of the first special symbol, for which a reach-less effect is to be performed by the variation is selected at the start of the variation, is obtained, In this configuration, an icon change failure effect that does not change the display color of the icon from white is executed.

  By the way, when the above-described first to fourth configurations are adopted, the following problems may occur. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the effect with reach is performed is selected in about 10% of the cases where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. The effect without reach is performed in about 90% of the loss. For this reason, in the fourth configuration, if the icon change failure effect is performed at a rate of, for example, 15% in the case where the reachless effect is performed, the icon change successful effect (see FIG. 13A) is difficult to be performed. As a result, icon change failure effects (see FIG. 13B) frequently occur, resulting in not only discomfort to the player, but also the item hitting the icon even if a friend character appears. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player does not have a sense of expectation and the effect of the icon change success effect is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in order to suppress such a problem from occurring, the sub CPU 131 determines the effect pattern of the icon effect by performing the following processing. That is, when it is determined in advance that the icon change effect is to be performed at the time of winning the first starting opening, the sub CPU 131 uses, for example, a random number when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon is started. One of the effect patterns A, B, and C is selected by the selected lottery, and the icon change effect is performed with the selected effect pattern.

Here, the effect pattern A is an icon change effect in which an icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) is performed from the start to the end of the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. It is an effect pattern.
The effect pattern B is an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) and a rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) during the period from the start to the end of the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. C)) and a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and then an icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) which is a success pattern of the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13B. ) Is an effect pattern of the icon change effect.
The effect pattern C is an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) and a rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) between the start and the end of the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. C)) and a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)), and thereafter, an upper icon change success effect (FIG. 13 (F)) which is a success pattern of the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13 (B). Performing the above-mentioned icon change effect.

  Here, when the icon change success effect of FIG. 13E is compared with the upper icon change success effect of FIG. 13F, there are the following differences. Specifically, for example, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13B) after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) in which the blue character possessed by the ally character is thrown but the icon cannot be hit can be hit. (E)), the same blue item as that used in the icon change failure production is used as the icon change success production, and the blue item is hit on the icon to make the icon change success production. An icon change success effect of changing the display color to blue is performed. The same applies to the case where the item used for the icon change failure effect is an item of another color (for example, green or red).

  On the other hand, when an upper icon change effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B), the following is performed. More specifically, for example, after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) in which the blue character possessed by the ally character is thrown but the icon cannot be hit, the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13B) 13 (F)), as the icon change success effect, an item of a higher color (here, for example, green, red, or gold) than that used in the icon change failure effect is used. An icon change success effect of causing the item of the higher color to hit the icon and changing the display color of the icon to the same higher color as the item is performed. The same applies to the case where the item used for the icon change failure effect is an item of another color (for example, green or red).

  In this manner, the color of the item used for the high-level icon change effect (see FIG. 13F) is higher than the color of the item used for the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). For this reason, for example, when an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) using the gold item that is the highest color is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) is performed. While it may be performed, there is a feature that the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) is not performed.

  As is clear from the description so far, the icon change success effect in FIG. 13E is changed to the same color as the icon color that could not be changed in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). While the effect succeeds in changing the icon, the successful icon change effect in FIG. 13F cannot be changed in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). Both are different in that the effect succeeds in changing the icon to a higher color than the icon color.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) as the so-called gaseous effect, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) and the upper An icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) may be performed. For this reason, the effect that the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) is performed can significantly reduce the expectation of the player for the change in the display color of the icon. It is possible to suppress it.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the icon change success effect using the same color item as that used in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B), the icon change failure effect A high-order icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) using an item of a higher color than that used in the effect (see FIG. 13B) can be executed. For this reason, the player can be made to feel unexpected, and a high effect is produced by the synergistic effect of the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) and the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F). Can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) and the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) appear in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). The action performed by the ally character (in this embodiment, the action of throwing an item aiming at the icon) is redone, and as a result, the effect succeeds in changing the display color of the icon. Therefore, in order to effectively suggest that the above-mentioned action is redone, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change success effect in FIG. 13E or the upper icon change success effect in FIG. Prior to this, a rewind effect (see FIG. 13C) and a failed rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, after the rewind effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), the icon change is performed. A description will be given of a case where a successful effect (see FIG. 13E) or a successful upper icon change effect (see FIG. 13F) is always executed.
On the other hand, in another embodiment, after the rewind effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed, the icon change failure in FIG. A configuration in which an icon change failure effect that is the same as or similar to the effect may be performed.
However, in this case, when a rewind effect (see FIG. 13C) and an unsuccessful rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed, the icon change failure effect is performed. In order to reduce the feeling of discomfort, when a rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (C)) and a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) are performed, the icon change success effect (FIG. 13 (E)) (See FIG. 13F) or an icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is easily performed, and it is preferable to employ a configuration in which the icon change failure effect is hardly performed.

<Example of successful icon change>
Next, a specific example of the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the icon change success effect.

  In FIG. 14 (A), the decorative symbol and the small symbol showing the same irregularity are permanently stopped in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon in the area 52 is “losing”. The illustrated state is illustrated. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, before the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, a variation 3 (here, “154”) is displayed. The two decorative symbols stop falsely. At that time, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the three decorative symbols indicating the ragged pattern are finally stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, the three small symbols that have been rotating at a high speed are completely stopped (without false stop) in a manner showing the same irregularities (see FIG. 14A). FIG. 14A illustrates a state after the icon is deleted from the area 52 with the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

  When a predetermined fixed time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the permanent stop of these decorative symbols and small symbols, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is performed. Be executed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 as the earliest hold icon until the fixed time elapses (see FIG. 14A). The earliest reserved icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as a new icon, and at the same time, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 and the high-speed rotation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53 are performed. It is started (see FIGS. 14A and 14B). Note that, as shown in FIG. 14B, with the shift of the earliest holding icon, the remaining holding icons (here, one white holding icon) displayed in the holding icon display area 51 are changed to the corresponding icons. It shifts in a direction approaching the region 52.

  Here, when the sub CPU 131 sets to execute the icon change success effect of changing the display color of the icon from white to green when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as follows. Production is performed. In other words, in a situation where the decorative design is displayed in a fluctuating manner and the small design is rotated at a high speed, a friendly character appearance effect in which a friendly character possessing a green item appears on the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5 (FIG. 14 ( C)).

  Subsequent to the ally character appearance effect of FIG. 14C, an effect display showing a state in which the ally character throws an item toward the icon is performed. Specifically, for example, an effect display in which a friendly character possessing a green item jumps is performed (see FIG. 14D), and then the jumped friendly character aims at the icon from the highest attainment point and turns to a green color. Is displayed (see FIG. 14E).

  Then, as the ally character that has been jumping descends, an effect display indicating that the thrown green item gradually moves closer to the icon is performed (FIG. 14E). To (G)), and finally, the green item hits the icon, and the icon changes so as to have the same display color as the hit item (see FIG. 14 (H)).

  Note that, here, the display color of the icon is changed to green. However, since the second configuration is adopted, the reach is always established after the icon change success effect is performed, and the final In addition, SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach will be developed.

  Also, here, the icon change success effect using green items has been described as an example, but the color of the items possessed by the ally character is limited to green as long as the color is higher than the display color of the icon. The color may be blue, red, or gold. For example, when the green icon is displayed, an icon change success effect using a higher-order red item or a gold item may be performed, while a lower-order blue item is used. There is no icon change success effect.

<Examples of rewind suggestion effects and failed rewind effects>
Next, specific examples of the rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the rewind suggestion effect and the failure rewind effect.

  FIG. 15A is a screen diagram illustrating an icon change failure effect, in which a green item thrown by a friendly character flies over the area 52 and, as a result, the green item displayed in the area 52 is displayed. An example in which the display color of the icon does not change is illustrated. In the icon change failure effect, an effect common to the icon change success effect is performed up to the middle. Specifically, the production display until the ally character possessing the item appears, the ally character jumps and throws the item, and the item flies toward the icon, is the same as the icon change success production (See FIGS. 14D to 14F). Then, in the case of the icon change failure effect, the item deviates from the trajectory toward the icon and falls into an area different from the area 52 (see FIG. 15A). That is, the icon change failure effect of the present embodiment is realized by performing the effect display of FIG. 15 (A) subsequent to the effect display of FIGS. 14 (D) to (F).

  FIG. 15 shows a state in which a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 during the icon change failure effect, and a second hold icon is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 51. .

  Here, the sub CPU 131 determines that the display color of the icon is finally changed to gold and that the upper icon change success effect using the gold item is performed after the icon change failure effect using the green item. If it is set at the start of the change, the following effect display is performed following the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 15A). That is, another character appears at the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 while the ally character that failed to hit the green item on the icon is displayed at the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5, and says "One more time!" An effect display indicating a state in which a line is spoken is performed (see FIG. 15B). This effect display indicates that after the icon change failure effect for the icon is performed, the icon change success effect for the icon is also performed. It can be said that it has a function as a rewind suggestion effect that suggests being returned.

  Note that FIG. 15B illustrates an example in which a rewind suggestion effect is realized by an effect display indicating that another character has appeared and utters the phrase “one more time!”. In the embodiment, for example, a rewind suggestion effect may be realized by performing an effect display indicating a state in which the hour hand and the short hand rotate counterclockwise and the time rewinds. That is, as long as it is possible to suggest that the icon change failure effect is to be rewound, the effect content of the rewind suggestion effect may be any.

  Next, following the rewind suggestion effect of FIG. 15B, a failure rewind effect of rewinding the icon change failure effect to the start of the icon change failure effect is performed (see FIGS. 15C to 15G). ). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the icon change failure effect performed in the order of FIGS. 14 (D) to (F) and FIG. 15 (A) is reversely reproduced. The speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced in reverse is the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced, that is, a series of effects of FIGS. 14 (C) to (G) and FIG. 15 (A) relating to the icon change failure effect. The same as the speed at which the display is played. However, the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced in reverse may be higher than the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced, or may be lower than the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced.

  As described above, in the unsuccessful rewind effect, first, an effect display is performed in which the item is returned to the state immediately before the item is dropped to an area different from the area 52 (see FIG. 15C). Next, an effect display indicating that the item returns to the position close to the hand of the ally character located at the highest arrival point is performed together with an effect display indicating that the ally character returns to the highest reaching point. (See FIGS. 15D to 15F). Then, an effect display indicating that the ally character that has caught the item descends to the position before the jump is performed (see FIGS. 15F to 15G).

  By the way, if the effect image relating to the failure rewind effect is displayed in the same color as the effect image relating to the icon change failure effect to be rewinded, the icon change failure effect and the rewind suggestion effect are interposed. The player may be confused with the failed rewind effect, and the player may not be able to clearly recognize that the failed rewind effect is being performed. That is, there is a possibility that the player cannot easily be informed that the icon change failure effect is being rewound.

Therefore, for example, by making the display mode of the effect image related to the failure rewind effect (the size and shape of the effect image) different from the display mode of the effect image related to the icon change failure effect, the two effects can be clearly distinguished. Can be applied.
However, when this configuration is applied, the relationship between the icon change failure effect and the failure rewind effect becomes thin, and eventually, the same problem as described above may occur.

  For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a failure rewind effect is performed for an icon change failure effect, the size or shape of the effect image (friend character or item) related to the failure rewind effect is changed by the icon change. The color of the effect image related to the failure rewind effect is set to be different from the effect image related to the icon change failure effect without changing the effect image (friend character or item) related to the failed effect. Specifically, in the icon change failure effect, white ally characters and green items are displayed, whereas in the failure rewind effect, gray ally characters and gray items are displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the failure rewind effect of rewinding the icon change failure effect to a point in time before the icon change failure effect ends (in the present embodiment, the start time of the icon change failure effect). Is performed.

  Note that, as is clear from the notations in FIGS. 15C to 15G, even when the failure rewind effect is being executed, three small symbols are displayed in order to notify that the first special symbol is being changed and displayed. The design is characterized in that the symbol continues to rotate at a high speed, and the variable display of the three small symbols is not rewound by the failed rewind effect.

Further, FIG. 15A shows that when an item thrown by a friendly character passes over the icon and falls into an area on the left side of the area 52, the first special symbol determination is displayed in the reserved icon display area 51. A state in which a second hold icon related to hold is newly displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, in the rewind effect illustrated in FIGS. 15C to 15G, the effect is rewound until the ally character throws the item, that is, before the state in FIG. 15A is reached. However, the hold icon display area 51 has not returned to the state before the second hold icon was displayed.
As is apparent from this, it can be said that the hold icon newly displayed during the icon change failure effect is not a target of the failure rewind effect.

<Example of successful icon change success>
Next, a specific example of the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a successful upper icon change effect.

  After the failure rewind effect is performed, the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed in the following flow. Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the color of the ally character that has returned to the jump position returns to white, and the possessed item (green item) changes to a higher-order item (for example, a gold item). (See FIG. 15H).

  In the decorative symbol display area 50, the five left symbols are pseudo-stopped during the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 15C), and then the right five symbols are pseudo-stopped to reach reach (FIG. 15G ))), Immediately after the reach is established, the upper icon change success production starts.

  Next, an effect display is displayed in which the ally character that has changed the item to a golden item jumps (see FIG. 16A), and then the ally character that jumped aims at the icon from the highest point and aims at the golden item. Is displayed (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

  Then, as the ally character that has been jumping descends, an effect display indicating that the thrown golden item gradually moves closer to the icon is performed (FIG. 16B). -(D)), and finally, the gold item hits the icon, and the icon changes so as to have the same display color as the hit item (see FIG. 16 (E)).

  Note that in FIGS. 15H and 16, the gold items are described in a manner different in size and shape from the green items, but these items have the same size and shape in each other. There may be.

  Also, here, the display color of the icon is changed to gold. However, since the third configuration is adopted, after the icon change success effect is performed, the SPSP reach or the story is finally completed. It will develop into reach reach.

  FIGS. 16 (F) and 16 (G) illustrate how the normal reach is developed and the SPSP reach introduction effect is performed.

  After the failure rewind effect is performed, the icon change successful effect (see FIG. 13C) is performed using the same color item as that used in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). This icon change success effect is performed in the same way as the upper icon change success effect, except that the color of the item used and the color of the icon changed by hitting the item are different. . For this reason, a detailed example of the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) following the failure rewind effect is omitted here.

[Features about failed rewind production]
The failure rewind has the following main features.
In other words, the failure rewind effect is characterized in that the effect is performed using a relatively narrow display area such as the area 52 and a part of the decorative symbol display area 50.

Also, after the failure rewind effect is performed, as a suggestion effect indicating that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than before the failure rewind effect is performed, the failure rewind effect is performed before the failure rewind effect is performed. An icon change success effect of changing the display color of the icon to the icon higher than the icon (see FIG. 13E) or a higher icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed.
For this reason, the player can recognize that the display color of the icon changes to a higher display color at the time of the failure rewind effect, and the icon change success is higher than the icon change success effect. It is possible to enjoy the subsequent game while expecting a performance.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a feature that the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display according to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced in the failure rewind effect. .

  In addition, during the icon change failure effect, while the corresponding effect sound corresponding to the icon change failure effect is output from the speaker 24, when the failure rewind effect targeting the icon change failure effect is performed. However, there is a feature that an effect sound for reverse reproduction of the corresponding effect sound is not output, but an exclusive effect sound unique to the failed rewind effect is output.

  When the failed rewind effect is being performed, the effect display related to the failed rewind effect is rewinded, but the effect displays related to other effects are not rewinded. Specifically, for character or item used for the failure rewind effect, the effect display that performs reverse playback is performed, but the decorative design and the effect display that reversely reproduces the effect related to the decorative pattern are performed. There is no. Specifically, with regard to the decorative symbols, when the failure rewind effect is being performed, the left five symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 15C), and then the right five symbols are pseudo-stopped to reach. The effect display that is established is performed (see FIGS. 15 (D) to (G)), and it is clear that the symbol change display using the decorative symbol does not rewind during the failed rewind effect. Also, as shown in FIGS. 15C to 15G, during the failed rewind effect, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed in the counterclockwise direction. The effect display in which the symbol rotates clockwise is not performed.

  Further, when the number of the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 51 during the icon change failure production increases (see FIG. 15A), until the start of the icon change production (that is, before the reserved icons increase). Even if the effect is rewound, an effect display in which the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is reduced by the failed rewind effect is not performed (FIGS. 15C to 15G). reference).

  Further, although not shown in the drawing, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, an effect display showing a state in which the main character and the ally character walk together is performed as an effect for displaying a background image. Even if a failure rewind effect is performed while the effect display related to the background image is performed, the reverse of the effect display related to the background image such that the main character and the ally character return to the original positions. No regeneration takes place.

  FIG. 15 illustrates an example in which the failure rewind effect is performed before the normal reach is performed. For example, the failure rewind effect is performed at another timing, such as a timing at which the normal reach reaches the SP reach. It is possible. Then, even if a failure rewind effect is performed at the timing of developing from the normal reach to the SP reach, the effect display relating to the reach development proceeds without being rewound. Here, the effect display relating to the reach development refers to an effect display in which three small symbols are rotated at high speed in a counterclockwise direction, or as shown in FIGS. 9C and 9D, a reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol). This is an effect display in which the reach symbol is moved from the decorative symbol display area 50 to the upper left and upper right while being reduced, and these reach symbols are pseudo-stopped in the display area after the movement.

[Modification of Icon Change Direction]
In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which a failure rewind effect is performed to rewind the effect up to the start time of the icon change failure effect. A failure rewind effect that rewinds to the point in time when the ally character throws the item) may be performed. In this case, the icon change success effect may be started in the middle of the icon change failure effect.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13C) is performed prior to the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D). However, in other embodiments, rewind is performed. A failure rewind effect may be performed without performing a suggestion effect.

  In addition, other objects such as tanks and airplanes may be displayed instead of friendly characters, and bullets fired from these objects may be used as items. That is, regarding the icon change success effect, the icon change failure effect, and the failure rewind effect, these effects may be performed using an object different from the ally character or the item.

  In addition, in a situation where the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) is not performed, the icon change success effect is always performed when the friendly character A appears, while the icon change successful effect is performed when the friendly character B appears. Alternatively, a configuration that can execute both the icon change success effect and the icon change failure effect may be adopted.

  In the present embodiment, after the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) or the upper icon change success effect (FIG. 13F) Is described as an example, but in other embodiments, after the failure rewind effect is performed, the upper icon change effect is always performed (the icon change successful effect is not performed). A configuration may be adopted.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the icon change failure effect is not performed after the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) is performed. However, in another embodiment, the failure rewind effect is not performed. In some of the cases where the icon change is performed, a configuration in which an icon change failure effect is performed thereafter may be adopted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a failure rewind effect is performed in which the effect display relating to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced. However, in another embodiment, the effect display relating to the icon change failure effect is performed in reverse. Instead, an icon change failure effect of cueing the effect to a predetermined time point of the icon change failure effect (for example, the start time of the icon change failure effect) may be performed. That is, a failure rewind effect may be performed in which the effect display at the end of the icon change failure effect is directly switched to the effect display at the start time of the icon change failure effect.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display relating to the icon change failure effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display according to the icon change failure effect is reproduced in the failure rewind effect. However, these speeds may be different from each other. That is, in the failed rewind effect, the speed at which the effect display relating to the icon change failure effect is reproduced in reverse may be faster or slower than the speed at which the effect display relating to the icon change failure effect is reproduced.

  Also, in the present embodiment, during the failed rewind effect, a dedicated effect sound for the failed rewind effect is output, but in other embodiments, during the failed rewind effect, the corresponding effect corresponding to the icon change failure effect An effect sound for reversely reproducing the sound may be output from the speaker 24.

[Flow of Reach Rewind Direction for Reach Direction]
Next, the flow of a reach rewind effect, which is a rewind effect performed for a reach effect, will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach rewind effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed before reaching or after reaching. This pseudo-sequence production is an effect in which the decorative symbol is made to appear as if it is displayed in a plurality of times during the one-time fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the greater the number of times the pseudo-sequence production is performed, the higher the jackpot reliability. A configuration is employed. Specifically, the pseudo continuous production is not performed when the pseudo continuous production is performed once while the special symbol is displayed once, and the production finally develops up to the second pseudo pseudo sequence. The jackpot reliability is higher than in the case. In addition, in the case where the pseudo continuous production is performed twice during the single fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the production eventually develops to the pseudo third series, the production finally proceeds to the pseudo second series. The jackpot reliability is higher than when it evolves.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a reach rewind effect of rewinding a predetermined reach effect is performed as the pseudo continuous effect. The reach rewind effect having the function of the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the following flow. That is, first, a special symbol called a pseudo consecutive symbol is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIGS. 17A and 18D).

  After the pseudo-sequence symbol is displayed, both the reach rewind effect (see FIG. 17B) and the reach reproduction effect (see FIG. 17D) described later are performed, so that the pseudo-sequence symbol is displayed. It can be said that the effect has a function of suggesting the execution of both the reach rewind effect and the reach reproduction effect.

  Next, following the display of the pseudo consecutive symbols, a reach rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 17B). The reach rewind effect is a rewind effect for a plurality of effect images related to the reach effect, and in the present embodiment, a decorative pattern displayed during the reach effect, a character appearing during the reach effect, and the like are displayed. Reach rewind effect is performed as a target. The reach rewind effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, when the reach rewind effect is performed, the effect images (decorative symbols and characters) related to the reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed, except for the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53. In the state after the rewinding, a freeze effect of stopping for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) is performed (see FIGS. 17C, 19A, and 19B).

  Then, following the freeze effect, a reach reproduction effect for reproducing an effect image relating to the reach effect is performed from the time point after the rewinding (see FIGS. 17D and 19C to 19E). When this reach reproduction effect is performed, it develops into a lower reach (for example, SP reach) (see FIG. 17E) or develops into a higher reach (for example, SPSP reach or story reach) (FIG. 17 ( F)).

<Specific examples of reach rewind and reach playback effects>
Next, specific examples of the reach rewind effect and the reach reproduction effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 18 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the reach rewind effect. FIG. 19 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the reach reproduction effect performed after the reach rewind effect.

  FIG. 18A illustrates a state in which the normal reach is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 52. Specifically, at the end of the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row is reduced in a state where the three left symbols and the right three symbols are pseudo stop in the decorative symbol display area 50 as the reach symbols, and are the same as the reach symbols. The state immediately after the middle symbol of the number has passed on the activated line is illustrated. Also, during the normal reach, the white icon is displayed in the area 52 here (see FIG. 18A).

  When the middle symbol with the same number as the reach symbol passes on the active line, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row increases and high-speed scrolling resumes, and it is difficult to identify the middle symbol displayed in the middle row. Become. At this time, the reach symbols (here, the left three symbols and the right three symbols) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced while maintaining the reach state, and are also displayed in the upper left area and upper right area of the liquid crystal screen 5. Respectively, and a development suggestion effect is suggested that suggests that the main character and the enemy character will develop into the first half battle (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). In this development suggestion effect, as illustrated in FIGS. 18B and 18C, a hero character performing a battle with an enemy character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. An effect display for searching for an enemy character is performed.

  Note that FIG. 18B illustrates an example in which the icon change effect in which the display color of the icon automatically changes from white to red at the timing of developing from normal reach to SP reach.

  Here, when the pseudo continuous production is performed, it is suggested that the production role object 7 moves to a predetermined production position in front of the liquid crystal screen 5 and rotates, and that the liquid crystal screen 5 performs the pseudo continuous production. The character “NEXT” (pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although not shown in the figure, an effect image indicating a clock is displayed behind the character “NEXT”, and the long hand and the short hand rotate counterclockwise and then clockwise. The counterclockwise rotation of the long hand and the short hand suggests the execution of the reach rewind effect (see FIGS. 17B and 18E to 18H), and the clockwise rotation of the long hand and the short hand. Thus, execution of the reach reproduction effect (see FIG. 17D and FIGS. 19C to 19E) is suggested.

  When the effect display using the character “NEXT” and the clock image is performed, the character “× 2” (pseudo The number of pseudo runs indicating whether the run is a run is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, orange). Then, as the reach rewind effect, an effect display using the protagonist character and an effect display that rewinds (reversely reproduces) the symbol change effect using the decorative symbol are performed (FIGS. 19E to 19E). H)). This reach rewind effect is performed using the decorative pattern display area 50 of the liquid crystal screen 5.

  With respect to the effect display using the main character, an effect display is performed in which the main character that has moved to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 to search for the enemy character returns to the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of appearance and disappears from the liquid crystal screen 5 ( (See FIGS. 18E and 18F). The hero character displayed during the reach rewind effect is the same character as the hero character displayed during the development suggestion effect, but is displayed in a different color (gray in the present embodiment) from the hero character. In that

  Regarding the symbol change effect using one decorative symbol, first, the upper left area and the upper right area of the liquid crystal screen 5 are returned from the state shown in FIG. 18B to the state shown in FIG. 18A. The purple left three symbols and the right three symbols that are moving to the other area are displayed as gray left three symbols and right three symbols (see FIG. 18E). After these three left and right gray symbols are erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 18 (F) and 18 (G)), the three left symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 during the reach development. , The middle 4 symbols, the middle 3 symbols, and the right 3 symbols all begin to be displayed as gray decorative symbols, and move slowly upward integrally with the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 18 (G) and (H)). ).

  FIG. 18H shows a state in which the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 has returned to the state immediately after the middle symbol having the same number as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line. However, since each of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is displayed as a gray decorative symbol, the arrangement of the decorative symbols is the same as that shown in FIG. The player can easily recognize that the decorative pattern is different from the decorative pattern shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the reach rewind effect is being performed, the effect display in which the symbol variation effect using the decorative symbol is reproduced in reverse, and the effect display using the character is reproduced in reverse. Effect display.

  During the reach rewind, the effect display related to the decorative pattern or the character is played back in reverse, but “× 2” indicating the number of pseudo repetitions, the icon displayed in the area 52, the reserved icon display area The effect display related to the hold icon displayed in 51 is not reversely reproduced. This is the same for the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53. Even during the reach rewind effect, each small symbol continues to rotate at a high speed (see FIG. 18A )-(H)).

  When the effect display is rewound to the point shown in FIG. 18A by the reach rewind effect, a freeze effect is performed (see FIGS. 19A and 19B). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the gray decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 in a row shown in FIG. 18H are stopped for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment). While the freeze effect is being performed, all effect images displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 remain stationary for two seconds except for each small symbol that continues to rotate at high speed in the small symbol display area 53.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the period during which the reach rewind effect is being performed and during the period in which the freeze effect is being performed, “× 2” indicating the number of pseudo-runs in the pseudo-run sequence All effect images displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed in gray, except for the characters of the symbol pattern and each small symbol display area 53 displayed in the small symbol display area 53. As a result, it is possible to effectively give the player the impression that the effect has rewinded and the time has stopped.

  Next, at the end timing of the freeze effect, a reach reproduction effect is performed (see FIGS. 17D and 19C to 19E). Specifically, first, all the effect images displayed in gray, including each decorative pattern that was stationary in the decorative symbol display area 50, start to be displayed in the original color, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 50 Is displayed again. That is, the three left symbols and the three right symbols that have been stationary become purple, which is the original display color, and start pseudo stop. In the middle row, after the middle 3 symbols and the middle 4 symbols in gray become purple and blue, which are the original display colors, respectively, the middle symbol row including these middle symbols is scroll-displayed at a low speed. Is started.

  This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the effect is returned to the predetermined point of the normal reach (see FIG. 18A) by the reach rewind effect, and the normal reach is resumed from the temporary point. is there.

  After the scroll display of the middle symbol row is started, when the middle symbol indicating the same number as the reach symbol (here, three symbols) passes over the active line, as illustrated in FIG. 18B. (See FIG. 19D). That is, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row is increased, the high-speed scrolling is resumed, and it becomes difficult to identify the middle symbol, and the liquid crystal screen is displayed while the reach symbols (here, the left symbol and the right symbol) are reduced. 5 moves to the upper left and upper right. Then, a protagonist character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 to search for an enemy character.

  Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 performs one pseudo continuous production (reach rewind production) during SP reach and rewinds the reach production, and finally, the SPSP reach ( When the variable effect pattern to be developed is set to the upper reach in FIG. 17 (F), the development effect suggesting the development to SPSP reach (see FIG. 19 (F)) and the introduction effect of SPSP reach (FIG. 19) (See (G)). Note that the development effect and the introduction effect of the SPSP reach are the same effects as the effects described above with reference to FIGS. 11C and 11D, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 performs one pseudo continuous production (reach rewind production) during SP reach, rewinds the reach production, and finally SP reach ( When the variable effect pattern that evolves to (lower reach of FIG. 17 (E)) is set, following the effect display of FIG. 19 (E), FIGS. 10 (H) and 11 (A) related to SP reach. 11), a series of effect displays are performed, and a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed at SP reach.

[Features of Reach Rewind Direction]
Reach rewind has the following main features.
That is, in the reach rewind effect, since a decorative pattern or a character appearing in the reach effect is used, a relatively large display area (a display area including at least the decorative pattern display area 50) in which the decorative pattern or the character is displayed. There is a feature that the reach rewind effect is performed by using.

  In the reach rewind effect, an effect of reversely playing an effect display (decorative symbol, character, background image) related to the symbol display effect using the decorative symbol is performed, while the effect is displayed in the small symbol display area 53. Each small symbol continues to rotate at high speed until it develops into SPSP reach (or story reach), so that there is no effect of performing a reverse reproduction of the fluctuation of each small symbol.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the display color of the icon changes from white to red when developing from the normal reach to the SP reach (see FIG. 18B). Even when the rewind effect is being performed or after the reach effect has been rewound until the SP reach reach has been developed by the reach rewind effect, the display continues to be displayed in red (for example, FIGS. 18E to 18H). 19 (A) to (C)). As described above, the reach rewind effect does not perform an effect of reversely reproducing the icon change effect such as returning the icon from red to white before the change.

  In addition, during the reach rewind effect, there is a feature that the effect of displaying the number of pseudo repetitions and the effect of reversely reproducing the effect display is not performed for the icon and the hold icon. That is, for example, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 and a new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 during the reach rewind effect, the reach rewind being executed is performed. There is a characteristic that the display of the hold icon display area 51 is not returned to the state before the hold icon is displayed by the effect (FIGS. 18 (F) to (H), FIGS. 19 (A) to 19 (A)). E)).

  In addition, since the effect of performing the reverse display of the effect display related to the hold icon is not performed, for example, after the icon change effect of changing the hold icon from white to green is performed, the icon change effect is performed rather than performed. There is a feature that the display color of the hold icon is not changed from green to white by performing the reach rewind effect of rewinding the reach effect to the previous time point. In addition, since the effect of performing the reverse display of the effect display of the icon is not performed, for example, after the icon change effect of changing the icon from green to gold is performed, the icon change effect is performed rather than performed. By performing the reach rewind effect of rewinding the reach effect to the previous time point, the display color of the icon does not change from gold to green.

  In addition, after the reach rewind effect is performed, the upper reach (for example, SPSP reach or story) is indicated as a suggestive effect indicating that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than before the reach rewind effect is performed. (Reach) (see FIG. 19 (F)) in some cases. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the development effect to be performed after the reach reproduction effect has been performed.

In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reach rewind effect described above with reference to FIG. 18 is performed twice during one change display of the first special symbol, and finally up to the third pseudo-sequence. In some cases, the effect may be developed. In this case, the above-described developed effect is more easily performed than in the case where the reach rewind effect is performed only once and the effect finally develops only up to the second pseudo sequence. There is.
Therefore, when the reach rewind effect is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the reach rewind effect to be performed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a feature that the speed at which the effect display according to the reach effect is reproduced and the speed at which the effect display according to the reach rewind effect for the reach effect is reversely reproduced are the same. .

  Also, during the reach effect, the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speaker 24, whereas when the reach rewind effect for the reach effect is performed, the reach effect sound is output. It is characterized in that an effect sound for reverse reproduction is output, but an exclusive effect sound unique to the reach rewind effect is output.

[Modification of reach rewind effect]
In the present embodiment, a reach rewind effect that rewinds the reach effect from the point at which the development suggestion effect related to the SP reach effect is being performed to a point in the middle of the normal reach (see FIG. 18A) is performed. Although a case will be described as an example, in another embodiment, a reach rewind effect in which an effect display related to a reach effect is reversely reproduced until a reach establishment timing which is a start timing of a normal reach may be performed. Also, for example, when the SPSP reach is performed, a reach rewind effect that reversely reproduces the effect display related to the reach effect halfway through the SP reach, or a reach wind that reversely reproduces the effect display according to the reach effect halfway through the normal reach. A return effect may be performed. That is, the rewind start point at which the rewinding of the reach rewind effect starts and the end point at which the rewinding of the reach rewind effect ends may be different from the time point exemplified in the present embodiment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the pseudo continuous effect functions as a reach rewind effect has been described as an example, but in another embodiment, a reach rewind effect may be performed separately from the pseudo continuous effect. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a reach rewind effect in which an effect display relating to a predetermined reach effect is reversely reproduced is performed.In other embodiments, instead of reversely reproducing an effect display relating to a reach effect, Alternatively, a reach rewind effect of cueing the effect to one point in a predetermined reach effect may be performed. In other words, a reach rewind effect may be performed in which the effect display at the start of rewinding in the predetermined reach effect is directly switched to the effect display at the end of rewinding in the reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced and the speed at which the effect display according to the reach rewind effect directed to the reach effect is reversely reproduced are the same, These speeds may be different from each other. That is, in the reach rewind effect, the speed at which the effect display according to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced in reverse may be higher or lower than the speed at which the effect display according to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced.

  Also, in the present embodiment, during the reach rewind effect, a dedicated effect sound unique to the reach rewind effect is output, but in another embodiment, during the reach rewind effect, the target reach effect is output. The effect sound for reversely reproducing the reach effect sound may be output from the speaker 24.

[Termination condition of time-saving game state]
Next, an end condition of the time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an end condition for ending the time-saving gaming state. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, conditions for terminating the time-saving gaming state are defined for each type of the number of time-savings provided by the big hit or the small hit, and information indicating these conditions is stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, the main CPU 101 performs control to end the time-saving gaming state based on information stored in the main ROM 102.

<Termination conditions specific to one time reduction>
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is “big hit”, and “7R time saving once big hit” is selected as the type of the big hit, One time saving is given (see FIG. 6C). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state after the jackpot game including the long open round game of 7R is performed reaches one, the game state changes from the time saving game state to the normal game state. Is carried out.

"7R time savings one big hit" is 1 / 7.5 (17.5) in one of the second special symbol determination and the four times of the second special symbol determination of holding the second special symbol determination four times. = 40/300) (see FIG. 6 (B)). Therefore, if the time-saving game state is continued until the second special symbol determination is performed two or more times, the second special symbol determination is performed six times or more in total, which is more advantageous to the player than expected. And the game characteristics may be lost.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the case of “7R time saving one time big hit”, the gaming state is changed on condition that the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving gaming state has reached one. The transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is made.

<Termination conditions specific to 5 work hours>
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is “big hit”, and the type of the big hit is “7R time saving 5 times big hit”, Five time savings are given (see FIG. 6C). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state after the big hit game is performed reaches five times, state control for shifting the game state from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. .
In addition, when the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, and the type of the small hit is “4R 5 times small hit” or “12R 5 times small hit”, 5 times Time savings are given (see FIG. 6D). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state after the big hit game following the small hit game reaches 5 times, the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state. State control is performed.

"5R jackpot for 5R 5th time", "5Rock for 5R for 4R", or "5Relative for 5R for 12R" is a total of 5 times of 2nd special symbol judgment and 4 times of holding of 2nd special symbol judgment In any one of the nine second special symbol determinations, a large hit (or a small hit) prepared assuming that the player aims to allocate a 1 / 7.5 small hit (FIG. 6 (B) )reference). For this reason, if the time-saving game state is continued until the second special symbol determination is performed six times or more, the second special symbol determination is performed ten times or more in total, which is more advantageous to the player than expected. And the game characteristics may be lost.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the case of "7R time reduction 5 times big hit", "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", or "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", the second time played in the time reduction game state On condition that the number of special symbol determinations reaches five, the gaming state is shifted from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

<End conditions common to 1 time reduction and 5 time reductions>
Further, in the present embodiment, when five time savings or one time savings are awarded, the number of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol performed after shifting to the time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit game. The game state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, on condition that the total number of times of the determination has reached 12 times.

  By the way, a gate for making a normal symbol determination is not provided in the left area of the game area 10, and the normal symbol determination is not performed unless the player makes a right hit. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal gaming state, or when the big hit game related to the first special symbol determination is performed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state. In the normal game state, even if it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated in the normal symbol determination, the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position only for 0.036 seconds, and the player makes a right-handed hit during the big hit game. Even if the game is performed, the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 12, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not suspended. This is not limited to the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the big hit game is executed, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, and the small hit game is performed. The same applies to the case where a jackpot game subsequent to is executed.

  For this reason, for example, when the above-mentioned big hit game ends in a state where the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, since the right of the second special symbol determination is basically not reserved, In the gaming state, first, the first special symbol determination is performed. On the other hand, if the number of time savings is one big hit, the time saving game state is ended on the condition that the first special symbol determination is performed after shifting to the time saving game state, The hold related to the second special symbol determination cannot be accumulated, and the game characteristics may be greatly deteriorated. This means that, in the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, for example, an unfamiliar player performs a left-hand instead of a right-hand, and as a result, one or more first special symbol determinations are performed. The same is true for

  For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when five time savings or one time saving is given in order to suppress the above-mentioned problem from occurring, the gaming machine 1 is shifted to the time saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state is continued until the total number of the 1 special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination reaches 12 times, and the time-saving gaming state is terminated on condition that the number of times reaches 12 times.

<Termination conditions specific to 100 work hours>
In the present embodiment, when 100 time savings are given, that is, when “7R time savings 100 times big hit” or “16R time savings 100 times small hits”, the game shifts to the time savings game state after the end of the big hit game. The gaming state is shifted from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state on condition that the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the number of the second special symbol determination performed after that has reached 100 times. And

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment ends the time-saving gaming state at the timing when the first (or fifth) second special symbol change display ends with respect to one time-saving (or five time-saving). I have to do that. For this reason, when the first (or fifth) second special symbol change display is being performed, the player can reserve the second special symbol determination on condition of four.

On the other hand, as an end condition for 100 time savings, a condition of terminating the time saving gaming state when the number of times of the second special symbol determination in the time saving gaming state reaches 100 times is defined, and one time saving (or If the same end control as in the case of (5 times) is performed, the second special symbol determination is performed a maximum of 104 times in total, which is excessively advantageous to the player.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, an end condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state when the number of times of the second special symbol determination in the time-saving gaming state reaches 100 is not defined.

<Termination conditions common to all working hours>
In addition, the result of the second special symbol judgment is "small hit", and the type of the small hit is selected as "4R short hit 5 times short hit", "12R short hit 5 times short hit" or "16R short hit 100 times hit". In this case, a small hit game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened is performed.

  By the way, based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the player can select the above three types of small hits. It is possible to specify which of the small hits has occurred. In other words, based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed, the player determines whether the current small hit is a small hit that is disadvantageous to himself (the small hit where the number of time savings is set to "5"), or It is possible to determine whether it is an advantageous small hit (small hit where the number of time savings is set to “100” times).

  Here, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, the small hit game is terminated only by not executing the big hit game following the small hit game. If a configuration is adopted in which the time saving game state is continued if the number of time savings remains, the following problem may occur. That is, for example, when the number of time savings is set to 100, the player can determine whether or not a small hit has occurred based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed every time the determination result of the second special symbol determination becomes “small hit”. If the type is specified and it is disadvantageous for oneself, such as “4R 5 time small hits” or “12R 5 time small hits”, the V winning port switch 198 is not made to win the game ball during the small hit game, In addition, only in the case of "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" which is advantageous to oneself, by making the V winning port switch 198 win a game ball during the small hitting game, a time reduction of 100 rotations is given. There is a possibility that a capture hit such as continuously generating "small hits" may be possible.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, the gaming state is changed to the time-saving gaming state at the end of the big hit game performed following the small hit game. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the game state is shifted to the time-saving game state after the small hit game ends. I will not let it. In the present embodiment, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, a game state setting process for setting the game state to the time saving game state (see step S745 in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48). By not executing the accompanying big hit game, a control that does not shift the gaming state to the time saving game state after the small hit game is completed is realized.

[Screen display during small hit game]
Next, the screen display during the small hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 21 is a time chart for explaining the screen display during the small hit game. FIG. 22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the screen display during the small hit game.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, as shown in FIG. 21, first, an opening period (“OP” in FIG. 21) that continues for a predetermined period (13 seconds in the present embodiment). Period ”). When the opening period ends, the slide member 191 operates in a predetermined opening pattern as the opening game (see FIG. 21). Specifically, the slide member 191 repeats the short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds and then closing the small winning opening 19 four times at predetermined intervals (for example, 2.4 seconds). Then, after the fourth short opening operation is performed, the interval period is shortened to, for example, about 1.227 seconds, and the slide member 191 opens the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds, and then closes the small winning opening 19. Is repeated 6 times at intervals of about 1.227 seconds. As a result, the small winning opening 19 is opened ten times in total during the opening period of 15 seconds.

  On the other hand, the following screen display is performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 21, at the beginning of the opening period of the small hit game, a small hit type display (see FIG. 22A) for notifying the small hit type is performed for 5 seconds, and subsequently, A right-handing suggestion display (see FIG. 22B) for urging the player to right-hand is performed for six seconds. Then, when 11 seconds (= 5 seconds + 6 seconds) elapse from the start of the opening period, a V region instruction to display a V region instruction image indicating a V region (an inner region through which the game ball of the V winning opening switch 198 passes). The display is performed (see FIG. 22C).

  When the small hit type display is performed, a special effect sound unique to the small hit type display is output from the speaker 24. When the right-hand suggestion display is performed, the special effect unique to the right-hand suggestion display is performed. Sound is output from the speaker 24. The same applies to the case where the V-region instruction display is being performed. When the V-region instruction display is being performed, a special effect sound unique to the V-region instruction display is output from the speaker 24, and the special effect sound is output. Is an effect sound different from the exclusive effect sound peculiar to the right-handing suggestion display, which makes it easier for the player to more clearly recognize that the right-handing is promoted.

  This V region instruction display is started two seconds before the opening game is started, so that the player can be notified in advance that the opening game is started, For a player who has not made a right-handed hit, it is possible to more effectively prompt a right-handed.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 20, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, not only the big hit game following the small hit game is not performed, but also the game state is changed. This is an extremely disadvantageous situation for a player who does not shift to the time-saving gaming state and is unable to store the hold related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, it is extremely important for the player to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning opening switch 198.

  For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the gaming ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even if a predetermined time (7 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the opening game, V An image different from the area instruction display is displayed. Specifically, when the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening game, a predetermined time before the opening game ends (3 seconds before in this embodiment). , The remaining time countdown display for displaying a countdown image for counting down the remaining time up to the reference time is performed (see FIG. 21).

  Note that, when the remaining time countdown display is started while the V-region instruction display is being performed, the remaining sound from the speaker 24 is replaced with a special effect sound unique to the V-region instruction display, which is not shown in the figure. The output of the special effect sound unique to the time countdown display is started.

<Specific examples of V region instruction display and remaining time countdown display>
Subsequently, a specific example of the V region instruction display and the remaining time countdown display will be described with reference to FIG. First, at the beginning of the opening period of the small hit game, for example, a small hit type display for displaying a character “Challenge BONUS” and a predetermined character celebrating the small hit is performed (see FIG. 22A). Then, following the small hit type display, a predetermined right-handed suggestion display is performed (see FIG. 22A). Specifically, for example, an arc-shaped arrow simulating a path on which the game ball moves by right-handing, and an effect image showing a state in which a predetermined character emits a voice "Aim at the right!" .

  Then, two seconds before the opening game starts, the V region instruction display is started (see FIG. 22C). More specifically, a small winning opening 19 including the V winning opening switch 198 and a front view image of the inside of the small winning opening 19 are displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal screen 5, and a large character “Aim for V” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 5. An animation showing a state in which a triple arrow displayed in the lower left area of the screen 5 and superimposed with three arrows including the character “Right” is moving from upper left to lower right is displayed above the liquid crystal screen 5. Will be displayed.

  If the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game, the V region instruction display is continued until the opening game ends (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the inside of the small winning opening 19 during the open game passes through the V winning opening switch 198, the V winning information display effect (see FIG. 22 (G)) corresponding to the passage is started. Thus, the V region instruction display is terminated.

  Next, when the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 at a timing when seven seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening game, the remaining time countdown display is started (FIGS. 22D and 22E). reference). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 22 (D), the characters “remain until the end”, the number “4.98” indicating the remaining time until the reference time on the right side thereof, and the “remain until the end” A band-shaped image including a character “Right 4.98” and a plurality of “Right-Shift →” characters arranged horizontally above and below the number is superimposed on the V region instruction image related to the V region instruction display.

  When the remaining time countdown display is being performed, a plurality of characters of “Right-handed →” flow from left to right, and the number indicating the remaining time up to the reference time is 0. Animation display related to the remaining time countdown display is performed so that the countdown is performed every 01 seconds (see FIGS. 22D and 22E).

  As long as the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 on the way, the number indicating the remaining time until the reference time decreases from “5.00” to “0.00” in increments of 0.01. However, when this number indicates a value between “5.00” and “3.00”, it is displayed in blue (see FIG. 22D), and “2.99” to “0.00”. Are displayed in red when the value is between () (see FIG. 22 (E)). That is, in the remaining time countdown display, the display mode (color in the present embodiment) of the numeral indicating the remaining time up to the reference time changes at the timing when two seconds have elapsed since the start of the remaining time countdown display.

  Next, if the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the remaining time countdown display, the remaining time countdown display ends and the V region instruction display is displayed. (See FIG. 22F).

  Here, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 while the V region instruction display is being performed, a V winning notification effect for notifying the V winning of the game ball is performed (see FIG. 22 (G)). More specifically, for example, a board lamp 25 (see FIG. 4) disposed near the small winning opening 19 and the V winning opening switch 198 emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the liquid crystal screen 5 is radiated from the V region. (See FIG. 22 (G)), and the display of the V-region instruction is terminated.

  It should be noted that the same V-prize information is also provided when the game ball has passed through the V-prize port switch 198 when the V-region instruction display is being performed before the remaining time countdown display is started (see FIG. 22C). An effect is performed, and the display of the V region instruction is ended accordingly. Also, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 when the V region instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are performed simultaneously (see FIGS. 22D and 22E), the same V winning is achieved. A notification effect is performed, and the V-region instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are ended accordingly.

  By the way, in a configuration in which the remaining time countdown display for counting down the remaining time until the end timing based on the end timing of the open game is performed, the following problem may occur. That is, for example, assuming that a time of about 2 seconds is required for a game ball hit right by the player to reach the V winning opening switch 198 from the launching device, the remaining time until the end timing is 1 second. Even if the player hits right after that, the game ball reaches the small winning opening 19 after the open game ends. For this reason, it is impossible to let the game ball pass through the small winning port 19, let alone letting the game ball pass through the V winning port switch 198, and as a result, the right to shift to the time reduction game state is lost. Will be.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a predetermined time longer than the average time (for example, 2 seconds) from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the V winning opening switch 198 (3 seconds in the present embodiment). The previous time is defined as a reference time, and a remaining time countdown display for counting down the remaining time until the reference time is performed. For this reason, even if the player makes a right-hand after the remaining time indicated by the remaining time countdown display approaches 0 seconds, basically, the game ball that has been right-handed to the V winning opening switch 198 is It is possible to pass.

  FIG. 22 (H) shows that when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game, the game ball is made to win the V in the ending period of the small hitting game immediately after the opening game ends. An example of a challenge failure effect of notifying that a failure has occurred is illustrated. Specifically, for example, an animation is displayed which shows a state in which the left door moving rightward and the right door moving leftward abut on the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the front is closed. "End" is displayed in the center of the message indicating failure of the challenge.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball has not passed the V winning opening switch 198 at the timing when seven seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening game, The remaining time countdown display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of non-V winning in which the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the opening game, the interval period in which the slide member 191 keeps the small winning opening 19 closed is shortened (see FIG. 21). Specifically, the interval period from the short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds to the next short opening operation is reduced from 2.4 seconds to about 1.227 seconds. Is done. For this reason, after the interval period is shortened, the game ball that has moved to the upper side of the slide member 191 that closes the small winning opening 19 until the next short opening operation is performed, compared to before the interval period is shortened. The time of staying on the slide member 191 is shortened. For this reason, the effect of suppressing the occurrence of non-V winning can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the remaining time countdown display and the shortening of the interval period.

<Modified example regarding V-region instruction display and remaining time countdown display>
The following configuration may be employed for the remaining time countdown display. That is, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches a predetermined time (7 seconds in the present embodiment), the characters “remain until the end” and a number indicating the remaining time until the reference time are displayed. A case will be described in which a remaining time countdown image including is displayed. However, in another embodiment, an image different from the remaining time countdown image may be displayed. For example, instead of the remaining time countdown image, when the elapsed time from the start of the opening game reaches a predetermined time, a character that emits a dialogue such as “Remaining time is short. Aim for V quickly!” Is displayed. It may be. That is, the image displayed when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches the predetermined time is a remaining time countdown image as long as it can effectively encourage the player to right-hand. May be different images.

  In the present embodiment, the V region instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are simultaneously performed. However, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening game was started, the game ball is set to the V winning opening switch 198. , The V-region instruction display may be temporarily interrupted and the remaining time countdown display may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the remaining time countdown image related to the remaining time countdown display is configured to include an instruction image indicating the V region.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the right-handed suggestion display is switched to the V-region suggestion display two seconds before the opening game starts, but in other embodiments, the display mode of the right-handed suggestion display is changed. The above-described switching may not be performed by changing the display mode to a display mode having the same function as the V region suggestion display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the V-region instruction display is continued until the end of the opening game. However, even if the player hits right before the end of the opening game, the player passes the game ball to the V winning opening switch 198. Since it is difficult to perform the display, the V region instruction display may be terminated a predetermined time before the opening game ends (for example, 1.5 seconds before).

<Modified example regarding end condition of time-saving game state>
In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which, when a game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during a small hitting game, control is performed not to execute a big hitting game following the small hitting game and not to shift to a time saving game state. I do. On the other hand, in another embodiment, as in the case of the first special symbol determination, all the hits related to the second special symbol determination are performed per type. A configuration similar to the embodiment may be applied. In this case, in, for example, 50% of the hits (per kind) related to the first special symbol determination, a jackpot game including a V round game in which the V winning opening switch 198 is long opened so that the game ball can pass, For the remaining 50% of hits, a jackpot game including a V round game in which the V winning port switch 198 is shortly opened when the game ball cannot pass (or is difficult to pass) is executed. When the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the V round game, another round game following the V round game is executed, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is changed to the “probable change game state”. To "." On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the V round game, another round game following this V round game is executed, but the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to “time reduction”. Game state ".
Here, the “probable change game state” has a higher probability of being determined to be one type (big hit probability) than the normal game state, and the game ball is set to the second starting port similarly to the time-saving game state in the present embodiment. This is a gaming state in which it is easy to win a prize.

[Screen Configuration Example of Liquid Crystal Screen 5 in Time-Saving Game State]
FIG. 23 is a screen diagram illustrating a screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time saving game state. When the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, as illustrated in FIG. 23, the decorative symbol display area 50 and the small symbol display area 53 are formed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as in the normal game state, Further, a right-turning suggestion image 54, a movement bar 55, a movement icon 56, and a pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 are displayed.

  When the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, it is necessary to make a right-handed aiming at the gate 16 and the second starting port 12, so that a right-handed suggestion to the player "right-handed →" An image 54 is displayed at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5.

<Small symbol display area 53>
The small symbol display area 53 is an area in which three small symbols that rotate counterclockwise in accordance with the change display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) are displayed, and are usually described with reference to FIG. This is the same display area as the small symbol display area 53 formed in the gaming state. In addition, in the time saving game state, since the right strike suggestion image 54 that is not displayed in the normal game state is displayed, the small symbol display area 53 is formed at a position slightly lower than that in the normal game state (FIG. 7). And FIG. 23).

<Move bar 55 and move icon 56>
The moving bar 55 corresponds to one change display of the second special symbol. When the change display of the second special symbol is started, the movement icon 56 located at the left end of the movement bar 55 moves rightward. Start moving towards. Here, when the number of time savings is set to one, the change display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “the main variation”) is performed in response to the first second special symbol determination performed first after the shift to the time saving game state. ) Is performed, the game is controlled in the time-saving gaming state, so that up to four holds related to the second special symbol determination can be accumulated. On the right side of the moving bar 55, there is provided an area for displaying a hold suggestion icon that is displayed in a number corresponding to the number of holds for the second special symbol determination. A hold suggestion icon is displayed. FIG. 23 suggests that, during the main fluctuation, three game balls are won in the second starting port 12 during the main fluctuation, and three reserves related to the second special symbol determination are accumulated. For example, a state in which three hold suggestion icons are displayed is illustrated.

  The hold suggestion icon related to the second special symbol determination displayed on the movement bar 55 does not move like the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination displayed on the hold icon display area 51. There is no target for icon change effects (icon change success effects or icon change failure effects).

  When the number of times saved is set to one, the movement icon 56 that has begun to move at the timing when the main fluctuation is started moves slowly to the right with the passage of time, and in the middle of the main fluctuation. It reaches near the right end of the moving bar 55 (see FIG. 27A). Then, when the movement icon 56 reaches near the right end of the movement bar 55, a challenge battle effect (see FIG. 24 (H)) described later is started. In this challenge battle effect, one of a total of five second special symbol determination results of the first time-saving second special symbol determination corresponding to this fluctuation and four suspended second special symbol determinations is performed. This is an effect performed to notify whether or not a "small hit" is made.

  That is, in the related art, it is common to perform a variable effect on each of the five second special symbol determinations and to notify a hit (small hit or not) at each second special symbol determination. However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a single challenge battle effect (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24) is provided to notify whether or not any of the five determination results of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”. H)). Then, when any of the determination results of the five second special symbol determinations is “small hit”, a victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) is executed as a result of the challenge battle effect, and the fifth fifth effect is performed. 2 If there is no “small hit” in the determination result of the special symbol determination (all are lost), a defeat effect (see FIG. 24 (I)) is executed as the result of the challenge battle effect.

<Pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57>
The pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 displays the number of times of the variation display of the second special symbol performed in the time-saving gaming state as a small number (or a natural number).

(When the number of times saved is one)
When the number of time savings is one, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long (for example, 130 seconds) is always selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the first rotation of time saving (final variation). . This is to encourage the player to make a right hit during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation so that four reserves related to the second special symbol determination are stored. In the decorative symbol display area 50, the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving game state is performed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol (the main variation) is performed. In order to imitate, a pseudo shortened change in which the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a shorter time (for example, 5 seconds) than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (for example, 1 second), and then a pseudo stop is performed repeatedly.
In this manner, by repeating the pseudo shortening change during the single change display of the second special symbol, it is possible to make the player feel as if the hold related to the second special symbol determination is reduced, Can be effectively promoted to right-hand. In other words, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from hitting the ball without launching the game ball during one variation display of the second special symbol.

  Then, every time the pseudo shortened fluctuation is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1. In the present embodiment, when the number of time savings is one, the initial display of the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 is “1.0”. Becomes 0.0, and a challenge battle effect is started.

(When the number of working hours is 5)
When the number of time savings is five, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is medium (for example, 30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol from the first rotation of the time saving to the fourth rotation of the time saving. Is done. Then, while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, the decorative symbol display area 50 performs the variable display for a shorter time (for example, 2 seconds) than the variable time of the second special symbol (for example, 0. (5 seconds) Pseudo shortening fluctuation for pseudo stop is repeatedly performed.

When the number of time savings is set to five, the result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" (or big hit) and the case where the result of the second special symbol determination is "losing" In a part of, the reach by the decorative symbol is established by any of the pseudo shortened variations that are repeated during the single variation display of the second special symbol, and the reach effect is performed when the reach is established. Or jackpot) or loss.
Note that which of the pseudo shortening fluctuations that are repeatedly performed to establish a reach depends on the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol and the effect pattern selected for this fluctuation pattern.
On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing” and it is determined that the reach effect is not to be performed, the reach is not established in any pseudo shortened variation, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is Notify that "losing".

  By adopting such a configuration, in a case where the number of time savings is given only five times less than the number of time savings of 100, by repeating the pseudo shortening change, more second special symbol determinations than actual are performed. It can be made to look like it is, and a high directing effect can be obtained.

  It is to be noted that this pseudo shortening variation is characterized in that it is not performed during the variation display of the second special symbol when the number of time savings is set to 100 times.

  Returning to the description of the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 of FIG. 23, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1 each time the pseudo shortening fluctuation is started. In the present embodiment, when the number of time savings is five, the initial display of the pseudo change number suggestion image 57 is “5.0”, and when the first change display of the second special symbol is performed, the pseudo display is performed. Each time the shortening change is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo change number suggestion image 57 decreases by “0.1” to “4.9”, “4.8”, and “4.7”. The move icon 56 moves rightward on the move bar 55. If the determination result of the first second special symbol determination is “losing”, when the first variation display of the second special symbol ends, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 is “ At the same time, the moving icon 56 reaches the right end of the moving bar 55. When the second special symbol change display is performed for the second time, the moving icon 56 returns to the initial position, and every time the pseudo shortened change is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo change number suggestion image 57 is changed to “4”. As a result, the moving icon 56 moves rightward on the moving bar 55 in accordance with 0.1 and “3.9”, “3.9”, and “3.8”. When the determination result of the second second special symbol determination is “losing”, when the second variation display of the second special symbol ends, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 is “ 3.0 ”and the moving icon 56 reaches the right end of the moving bar 55. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second second special symbol determination is “small hit” (or “losing”), the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 becomes “3.0”, that is, A reach is established before the movement icon 56 reaches the right end of the movement bar 55, and after a predetermined reach effect is performed, a hit notification effect (or a loss notification effect) is performed.

  In the case where the number of time savings is five, an effect similar to that which is always performed in the above-described main variation when the number of time savings is one is performed at the fifth rotation of the time savings, and a description thereof will be omitted.

(When the number of working hours is 100)
When the number of time savings is 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. As described above, when the number of time savings is 100, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short. Nothing is done. Therefore, the moving bar 55 and the moving icon 56 are not displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the number of time savings is 100, the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 is displayed in the same manner as in the case where the number of time reductions is 1 or 5; The initial display is “100”, and the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 decreases by “1” each time the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination continues to be “losing”, the number indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 decreases to “99”, “98”, and “97”. Go.
On the other hand, when the number of time savings is 100, the pseudo shortening change is not performed, so that the moving bar 55 and the moving icon 56 are not displayed during the change display of the second special symbol.

  Further, when the number of time savings is 100, a small hit of 1 / 7.5 can be allocated within 100 rotations, so that it is easy to generate a small hit. For this reason, even when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, as in the case of “losing”, the variation time of the second special symbol is the relative variation time of the second special symbol. (For example, 2 seconds). For this reason, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination becomes “small hit” when the number of time savings is 100, instead of establishing the reach and performing the reach effect, the variation symbol and the small symbol are started to be displayed. Immediately after this, an immediate hit effect is performed in which the decorative symbols and small symbols are completely stopped.

[About RUSH Challenge Battle]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RUSH challenge battle and the RUSH challenge battle are performed in order to easily inform the player of whether or not the player enters the RSUH state in which the player can easily enter the small hit by giving 5 or 100 time savings. A series of named effects are performed (see FIG. 24).

  In this RUSH challenge battle, one time saving is given, and if the determination result of the first second special symbol determination after shifting to the time saving game state is “losing”, the second special in the first rotation is performed. This is performed so as to straddle a symbol variation display (for example, a long variation of 130 seconds) and four times of variation display of the second special symbol performed when the reserved second special symbol determination is exhausted (FIG. 25 (B) and (C)).

  In the RUSH challenge battle, one time saving is given, and if the result of the first second special symbol determination after the shift to the time saving gaming state is “small hit”, the first time of the first rotation is reduced. 2 It is performed during the fluctuation display of a special symbol (for example, a long fluctuation of 130 seconds) (see FIG. 25A).

  On the other hand, if five time savings are awarded and the determination results of the five second special symbol determinations performed after shifting to the time saving gaming state are all "losing", the second special in the fifth rotation The RUSH challenge battle straddles the symbol variation display (for example, a 130 second long variation) and the four second symbol variation display performed when the reserved second special symbol determination is exhausted. Done.

  In addition, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the fifth time after the shift to the time-saving game state is "small hit", the change of the second special symbol in the fifth rotation is given. A RUSH challenge battle is performed during the display (for example, a long fluctuation of 130 seconds).

[Rush Challenge Battle Flow]
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a flow of the RUSH challenge battle. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed during the normal gaming state is “big hit”, and when “7R time savings once big hit” is selected as the type of big hit, After the end of the jackpot game in which the seven long open round games are performed, the effect of the RUSH challenge battle is performed according to the flow illustrated in FIG.

  When the big hit game of 7R ends and the game shifts to the time saving game state, first, a first charge promotion effect (see FIG. 24A) is performed. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which, when a game is being controlled in a normal gaming state or when a jackpot game is being performed, a game ball is not basically won in the second starting port 12. I have. Therefore, immediately after the shift to the time-saving game state, the second special symbol is in a stopped state, and the number of reserved second special symbol determinations is also “0”. For this reason, in order to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a first charge promotion effect (see FIG. 26 (A)) for urging the player to make a right hit is performed.

  When the player makes a right strike in response to the first charge promotion effect and a game ball wins in the second starting port 12, the first time saving change is started (see FIG. 26B). Specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol, the high-speed scroll display of the three symbol columns in the decorative symbol display area 50, and the high-speed rotation of the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 are simultaneously started ( FIG. 26 (B)).

  As described above, when the change display of the second special symbol is started, the moving bar 55 described above with reference to FIG. 23 is displayed at the lower end of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 24C). Then, a movement icon 56 is displayed at the left end of the movement bar 55 (see FIG. 24D).

  By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a series of RUSH determination results of a total of five second special symbol determinations, that is, the second special symbol determination of one time reduction and the four reserved second special symbol determinations, are performed. Although the configuration of notifying in the challenge battle result effect is adopted, the victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) or the defeat effect (see FIG. 24 (I)), which is the result effect of the RUSH challenge battle, is reduced by one hour. The process is started during the second variable display of the second special symbol (see FIGS. 25B and 25C). For this reason, at a predetermined timing (timing at which the winning effect or the defeating effect is started) during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the first time saving, the four preliminary symbols related to the four held second special symbol determinations are determined. It is necessary to acquire judgment information in advance and determine which of the victory effect and the defeat effect is to be performed.

  Therefore, in order to start the victory effect or the defeat effect from the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the first time saving, the player makes a right-handed operation to reserve up to four upper limits of the second special symbol determination suspension. There is a need.

  For this reason, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the first time saving is started, a second charge promotion effect for causing the player to hold the suspension of the second special symbol determination is performed (FIG. 24E) FIG. 26D).

  When the player makes a right strike in response to the second charge promotion effect, the display of the second special symbol is being changed, so that every time a game ball wins in the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination is performed. The right is suspended, and accordingly, the same number of suspension suggestion icons as the number of suspensions in the second special symbol determination are displayed in the right area of the moving bar 55.

  In this way, when the number of reserves for the second special symbol determination reaches “4” and four reserve suggestion icons are displayed on the moving bar 55, the number of suspensions for the second special symbol determination is up to the upper limit of four. A charge completion suggestion effect indicating accumulation is performed (see FIGS. 24 (F) and 26 (E)).

  Although not shown in FIG. 24, when the pseudo shortened fluctuation described above is repeated and the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 becomes “0.0” and the moving icon 56 moves to near the right end of the moving bar 55, Then, the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50 to establish a reach (see FIGS. 24 (G) and 27 (B)). Then, a challenge battle effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle is started (see FIG. 24 (H), FIGS. 27 (D) to (G), and FIG. 28 (A)).

  Then, when the challenge battle ends and the timing to start the victory effect or the defeat effect is reached, the sub CPU 131 determines whether the victory effect or the defeat effect is to be performed. The following determination processing is performed based on the start command and the hold command. Specifically, based on the information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100 when the variation display of the second special symbol is started this time, the second special symbol of the first time saving this time is set. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is “small hit”. In addition, when the held second special symbol determination is performed based on the advance determination information included in the hold command received from the game control board 100 every time the second special symbol determination is held, “ Specify whether it is determined as "small hit". Then, based on these two specific results, it is determined which of the victory effect and the defeat effect is to be performed.

  When the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first time saving this time is “losing” and all the determination results of the four reserved second special symbol determinations are “losing”. It is determined that a defeat effect (see FIG. 24 (I)) will be performed. In this case, after the defeat effect is performed following the challenge battle, a predetermined challenge end effect is performed (see FIG. 24 (J)).

On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first time saving this time is “small hit”, the sub CPU 131 determines to perform the victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)). In this case, after the victory effect is performed following the challenge battle, the small hitting game (see FIG. 24 (L)) is started.
Further, the sub CPU 131 determines that the result of the first time saving second time second special symbol determination is “losing” and one of the four held second special symbol determining results is “small hit”. Similarly, when it is determined that there is a winning effect, it is determined that a victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) is to be performed.

  The victory effect is started during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving. However, as is clear from the description of the above two cases in which the victory effect is determined to be performed, the present embodiment is implemented. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving this time is “small hit”, a victory effect is performed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation. . On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction is “losing”, the same victory effect as the above victory effect is performed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the first time reduction. (See FIGS. 25A and 25B).

[Specific example of RUSH challenge battle]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 25 is a time chart for explaining the effect performed during the RUSH challenge battle and the display mode of the small symbols. 26 to 30 are screen diagrams illustrating specific examples of the RUSH challenge battle.

  FIG. 26 (A) illustrates an example in which the first charge promotion effect described above with reference to FIG. 24 is performed immediately after the jackpot game relating to the first special symbol determination is completed and the game is shifted to the time saving game state. Have been. Immediately after the jackpot game has been completed and the game has been shifted to the time-saving game state, the right for the second special symbol determination has not been obtained at all. When the right to determine the first special symbol is not reserved, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a stopped state. For this reason, in the small symbol display area 53, the same small symbols as those that have been completely stopped before the big hit game is started are completely stopped in the final stopped state.

  The first charge promotion effect of the present embodiment is achieved by displaying a charge promotion image in which the character “Right” is superimposed on the upper left of a large right arrow including the character “CHARGE” in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. This is realized (see FIG. 26A). In addition, here, since the time has been shifted to the one time saving game mode of one time saving according to the “7R one time saving big hit” according to the first special symbol determination, the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image indicating the number of “1.0” Is displayed at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 26A).

  When the player makes a right hit and the game ball wins the second starting port 12 in the situation where the first charge promotion effect is being performed, the second special symbol determination is executed. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the variable symbol display is started so that the three symbol columns scroll from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display area 50, and the small symbol display area is displayed. At 53, high-speed rotation of three small symbols is started (see FIGS. 26A and 26B).

  In addition, since the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is the start of the first pseudo shortening fluctuating, the number indicated by the pseudo fluctuating number suggestion image is “1” as the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started. .0 "to" 0.9 "(see FIGS. 26A and 26B). In addition, as soon as the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started, the moving bar 55 and the moving icon 56 are displayed, and the moving of the moving icon 56 is started (FIGS. 26B to 26C, FIG. 24). (B) to (D)).

  When the movement of the movement icon 56 is started, the second charge promotion effect is started (see FIGS. 26D and 24E). In the present embodiment, in the second charge promotion effect, a reduced image obtained by reducing the charge promotion image which has the same display content as the charge promotion image used for the first charge promotion effect is used (FIG. 26). (See (A) and (D)). In FIG. 26 (D), the player makes a right-handed hit, a game ball wins in the second starting port 12, and the number of reserves in the second special symbol determination becomes “1”. 10 illustrates an example in which one hold suggestion icon is displayed.

  When the number of reserves for the second special symbol determination reaches the upper limit “4” in the state where the second charge promotion effect is being performed, the reserve suggestion icons displayed in the right area of the moving bar 55 become four, and the charge is made. A completion suggestion effect is performed (see FIGS. 26 (E) and 24 (E)). In the present embodiment, the charge completion suggestion effect is realized by changing the character of “CHARGE” in the reduced image used for the second charge promotion effect to “MAX”.

  Next, when it is time to pseudo-stop the decorative symbol with respect to the first pseudo shortening variation, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a loss ("213" in FIG. 26 (F)) (FIG. 26 (F)). When these decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time, the three symbol rows are restarted, and a second pseudo shortening variation is started (see FIG. 26 (G)). With the start of the second pseudo shortened fluctuation, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1 to “0.8” (see FIGS. 26F and 26G). Then, at the timing of pseudo-stopping the decorative image with respect to the second pseudo shortening variation, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a loss ("824" in FIG. 26H), and then the third pseudo-simulation is performed. Shortening fluctuations are started.

  In FIG. 27 (A), as a result of repeating the pseudo shortening fluctuation ten times, the number indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 becomes “0.0” and the moving icon 56 is displayed near the right end of the moving bar 55. 9 symbols (9 symbols on the left) in the left column of the decorative symbol display area 50 are quasi-stopped, and the same 9 symbols (9 symbols on the right) move slowly from above in the right column, and reach is reached in 9 symbols. An example is shown in which a reach establishment promotion effect that raises a player's expectation of being established is being performed.

  As a result of the reach establishment provoking effect, the reach is established when the nine right symbols, which are the same as the left nine symbols, are pseudo-stopped on the payline (see FIGS. 27B and 24G). When the reach is established in this way, a development suggestion effect that suggests that the game will develop into a challenge battle effect is performed (see FIG. 27C). Specifically, the background image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 changes to a white-white background image, and the reach symbol (here, nine symbols) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is erased. Then, along with this, while the left small symbol and the right small symbol are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the same number (here, “9”) as the reach symbol, the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see FIG. 27C). ).

  When the development suggestion effect is performed, the movement bar 55 and the movement icon 56 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are erased, and the hero character and the enemy character confront each other, and a challenge battle effect is started (FIG. 27C). And (D)). When the challenge battle effect is started in this way, for example, an offense and defense effect showing a state in which the main character and the enemy character unfold and attack is performed (see FIG. 27E). Then, for example, when approaching the middle stage of the challenge battle effect, a telop display for displaying a line generated by the main character or the enemy character on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed (see FIG. 27 (F)). FIG. 27F illustrates an example in which a telop display in which an enemy character emits a line is performed. Also, in this telop display, there are cases where the characters of the dialogue are white and red, and the latter case has a feature that the jackpot reliability is higher than that of the former case.

  Next, when approaching the final stage of the challenge battle effect, a provoking effect that increases the player's expectation that the main character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle is performed (see FIG. 27 (G)). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (G), an effect display showing a state in which a beam emitted from a weapon (ray gun) held by the hero character goes toward the enemy character is performed.

  When the fanning effect of FIG. 27 (G) is performed, an operation promoting effect is performed (see FIG. 28 (A)). In this operation promoting effect, an effective period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set in advance. For example, a button image imitating the effect button 26 and a “press!” Prompting the player to operate the effect button 26 are displayed. Characters and a validity gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

<When the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of time saving is a small hit>
Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the current time saving is started is “small hit”, a game for the operation promoting effect is performed. In response to the player operating the effect button 26, a victory effect indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first turn of the time saving is "small hit" is performed (see FIG. 28B). ). Specifically, it is assumed that the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 in the reach mode have been pseudo-stopped in the mode showing the double eyes (here, "999"), and that the main character has defeated the enemy character. The character "Defeat!" And the character who rejoices in winning the battle are displayed.

  If the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the valid period, the victory effect is started in response to the expiration of the valid period.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display area 50 in which the decorative symbols are not displayed, the three decorative symbols indicating the same zoro eyes (here, "999") as the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 28C). ). Note that, here, there is a possibility that the three decorative symbols indicating the “999” double-eye pattern may change due to the above-described symbol promotion effect, and the three decorative symbols indicating the “999” double-eye pattern will stop as they are. Has not been determined. For this reason, in the small symbol display area 53, as the three decorative symbols indicating the zigzag pattern of "999" start to pseudo stop, the high-speed rotation of the three small symbols is restarted (see FIG. 28C). .

Then, when "16R time savings 100 times small hits" is selected as the type of small hits related to the second special symbol determination of the first rotation of the time saving, three decorative symbols indicating the zigzag pattern of "999" are: The pattern changes to a "777" slot corresponding to "16R time reduction 100 times small hit", and along with this, three small symbols also showing the "777" slot stop in a pseudo manner. Then, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three decorative symbols showing the “777” zoro pattern are displayed. The small symbols stop at the same time (see FIG. 28D).
On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when “12R time reduction 5 times small hits” is selected, three decorative patterns showing the “999” zigzag pattern are “12R time reduction 5 times small hits”. Is changed to the "333" slot, and three small symbols also indicating the "333" slot stop in a pseudo manner. Then, as the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three decorative symbols showing the zoro of "333" are displayed. Small symbols stop at the same time.
In addition, when "4R time reduction 5 times small hits" is selected, the three decorative symbols indicating the "999" zigzag pattern are not changed, and the three small symbols indicating the "999" zigzag pattern are not changed. Perform a pseudo stop. Then, as the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three decorative symbols showing the "999" zoro-eye are displayed. Small symbols stop at the same time.

  FIG. 25A shows the movement of the second special symbol and the display performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving is “small hit”. It is a time chart which shows the correspondence of the effect and the movement of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53.

  Up to here, referring to FIGS. 26 (A) to 26 (H), FIGS. 27 (A) to 27 (G), and FIGS. A series of effects in the case where the result is "small hit" has been described. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is performed. In the first half of the period (130 seconds in the present embodiment), pseudo shortened fluctuation using the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 50 is repeated, and three small symbols are rotated at high speed in the small symbol display area 53. .

  When the reach is established, in the small symbol display area 53, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are pseudo-stopped in a mode indicating the same number as the reach symbol (here, “9”), and the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at high speed. I do. On the other hand, in the display area including the decorative symbol display area 50, the decorative symbol is not displayed, and the challenge battle effect is performed. Then, when approaching the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving, the above-mentioned victory effect is performed in a state where the three small symbols indicating the zoro eyes are pseudo stopped. Then, as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols indicating the slots are completely stopped.

<When all are lost, including suspension>
FIG. 25 (C) shows that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving is “losing”, and four second special symbols accumulated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving. The movement of the second special symbol, the display effect performed using the decorative symbol display area 50, and the display in the small symbol display area 53 when all of the preliminary determination information corresponding to the suspension of the determination indicates “losing”. It is a time chart which shows the correspondence with the movement of the small symbol.

  The determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first rotation of the time saving this time is "losing", and the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving has been exhausted. In all cases, when the game is “losing” (see FIG. 25C), the following effects are performed. Specifically, as is clear from the comparison between FIG. 25A and FIG. 25C, until the challenge battle effect during the change display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is completed, one rotation of the time saving is completed. An effect common to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the eyes is “small hit” is performed. That is, effects common to the series of effects shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to (H), FIGS. 27 (A) to (G), and FIG. 28 (A) are performed.

  On the other hand, when all the determination results of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time reduction and the four retained second special symbol determinations are all "losing", the first rotation of the first rotation of the time reduction is performed. 2 At the end of the special symbol change display, a defeat effect is performed instead of a victory effect (see FIG. 25C). Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 26 in the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 28A, for example, a defeat effect indicating that the hero character is defeated in a battle with the enemy character and falls down. Is performed (see FIG. 28E). Note that, even when the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the effective period related to the operation promoting effect, the defeat effect is similarly performed in accordance with the expiration of the effective period.

  Note that when the defeat effect is being performed, the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the determination result of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is "losing". In the display area 53, three small symbols indicating reach loss eyes (for example, “919”) are pseudo-stopped (see FIGS. 28E and 25C).

  Subsequently, as the lost symbol is finally stopped as the second special symbol during the variable display, the challenge illustrated in FIGS. 28 (F) to (H) and FIGS. 29 (A) to (F) is completed. An effect is performed (see FIG. 25C). Specifically, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the same as described above with reference to FIG. First, an animation showing a state where the left door moving rightward and the right door moving leftward abuts at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the front is closed is displayed. Indicates the text "End Challenge".

  In addition, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, a reach loss eye (here, “919”) is shown at the time of defeat production. The three small symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in this mode are permanently stopped as they are (see FIGS. 28 (E) and (F)).

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the stop symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is determined, and the second special symbol is determined. For example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected as the symbol variation pattern. In response to this, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is “losing”. In addition, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as one second is selected, three small symbols are moved at high speed for one second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. After rotating (see FIG. 28 (G)) and the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three small symbols indicating the irregularities (here, “549”) are finally stopped (FIG. 28). (H) and FIG. 25 (C)).

  Note that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 28 (F) to (H)). .

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. The symbol determination is performed, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. In response to this, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the second hold is “losing”. In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are moved at high speed for 1 second with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29 (A)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three small symbols indicating the irregularities (here, “416”) are completely stopped (FIG. 29). (B) and FIG. 25 (C)).

  Note that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 29A and 29B). .

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is performed. The symbol determination is performed, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. In response to this, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “losing”. In addition, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are moved at high speed for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29 (C)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the irregularities (here, “835”) are finally stopped (FIG. 29). (D) and FIG. 25 (C)).

  Note that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 29C to 29D). .

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold, the second symbol corresponding to the last fourth hold is held. The two special symbols are determined, and a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second, for example, is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In response to this, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold is “losing”. In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is extremely short as one second is selected, three small symbols are moved at high speed for one second with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29 (E)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three small symbols indicating the irregularities (here, “352”) are completely stopped (FIG. 29). (F) and FIG. 25 (C)).

  It should be noted that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained from the start to the end of the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold (FIGS. 29E to 29F). reference). Then, when a predetermined fixed time elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold, the left door and the right door are opened, and the normal screen corresponding to the normal game state is exposed. (See FIG. 29 (G)). At this time, the character "← Return the steering wheel to the left" prompting the player to return to left-handed is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the sound corresponding to the character is output from the speaker 24.

  So far, the challenge end effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 28 (F) to (H) and FIGS. 29 (A) to (F). However, as is clear from the explanation, the challenge end effect is After the stop display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first rotation is started, the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is stopped and displayed, and is continued until a predetermined fixed time has elapsed (FIG. 25). (C)). Then, while the screen display relating to the challenge end effect is maintained, the loose eye (here, “919”) notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time saving is a loss is finally stopped. (Refer to FIG. 28 (F)). In the state where the screen display relating to the challenge end effect is maintained as well, one of the two special symbols corresponding to the first hold is displayed with a variable display interposed therebetween. The irregularity (here, “549”) that informs that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the hold of the eye is a loss is permanently stopped (see FIG. 28H). Then, in a state where the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, a second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is placed across a period in which the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is performed. Variations (here, “416”) notifying that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a loss are completely stopped (see FIG. 29B), and the fluctuation of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold With the display period interposed, the irregularity (here, “835”) that informs that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is a loss is completely stopped (FIG. 29 ( D)). And finally, in a state where the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, the fourth hold is supported with a period in which the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is performed. The irregularity (here, “352”) that notifies that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is permanently stopped (see FIG. 29F).

  On the other hand, as described above, the decorative symbol may not be displayed during the challenge end effect performed over the five stop display periods in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. Instead, the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are intermittently notified that the determination results of the five second special symbol determinations are missing.

  For this reason, it is difficult for the player to notice that the second special symbol determinations corresponding to the four holdings are sequentially completed while the challenge end effect is being performed, so that a total of five second special symbols including the four holdings are provided. It is possible to effectively perform one challenge end effect of notifying that all the determination results are lost.

<If the first turn of time is lost and there is a small hit in the hold>
FIG. 25 (B) shows that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving is “losing”, and four second special symbols accumulated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving. Using the movement of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol display area 50 when the preliminary determination information corresponding to the third hold among the preliminary determination information corresponding to the hold of the determination indicates “small hit”. 6 is a time chart showing a correspondence relationship between a display effect performed and a movement of a small symbol in a small symbol display area 53.

  The determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time reduction this time is "losing", and the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction is sequentially exhausted. When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit” (see FIG. 25B), the following effect is performed. Specifically, as is clear from the comparison between FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B, until the challenge battle effect during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is completed, one rotation of the time saving is completed. An effect common to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the eyes is “small hit” is performed. That is, effects common to the series of effects shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to (H), FIGS. 27 (A) to (G), and FIG. 28 (A) are performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit”, the time savings of one rotation is completed at the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first time savings rotation. Although the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the eyes is “losing”, a victory effect is performed (see FIG. 25B). Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 26 with respect to the operation promoting effect shown in FIG. 28 (A), the same victory effect as shown in FIGS. 28 (B) to (D) is performed. (See FIGS. 30A and 30B). Specifically, the characters “defeat!” Indicating that the hero character has defeated the enemy character and a state in which the hero character who won the battle is pleased are displayed.

However, the victory effects illustrated in FIGS. 28B to 28D and the victory effects illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B are different from each other in the following points.
That is, the victory effects exemplified in FIGS. 28B to 28D are effects performed for the purpose of notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving is “small hit”. For this reason, in the small symbol display area 53, the three small symbols in the mode indicating the slotted eyes are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped.

  On the other hand, the victory effect illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B is for the purpose of notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit”. It is a production performed in. For this reason, in the small symbol display area 53, the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation is “losing”, and one of the determination results of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the four reservations is “ In order to notify that "small hit" has occurred, three small symbols indicating reach loss eyes (here, "9V9") whose small and medium symbols are "V" are pseudo-stopped and then fully stopped (FIG. 30 (A)). (B) and FIG. 25 (B)). When the small and medium design is rotating at high speed, the small and medium design instantly indicates any one of numbers 1 to 9 and does not indicate “V”. For this reason, the display of the three small symbols including the small and medium symbols indicating “V” such as “9V9” is, for example, to change the small and medium symbols indicating “1” displayed next to “9” to “ This is realized by replacing the symbol with a small and medium symbol indicating "V". The same is true for the case where a loose eye including a small and medium design indicating “V” is displayed.

  In this way, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the three small symbols indicating the reach loss eyes whose medium and small symbols are “V” are finally stopped, these three small symbols are Zoro. Since the eyes are not formed, the player can recognize that the determination result of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is "losing". In addition, although the three stopped small symbols do not form the zigzag pattern, a small symbol of "V" (small and medium in this embodiment) suggesting that there is a second special symbol determination that is a small hit in the hold. The player can recognize that there is an item that is determined to be "small hit" among the four holdings related to the second special symbol determination since the symbol "Symbol" is included. is there.

  However, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the decorative symbol display area while the victory effect shown in the screen diagrams after FIG. 30 (A) is being performed. For this reason, when the victory effect is being performed, whether the victory effect is being performed with respect to the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first turn of time saving being “small hit”, or Since it is not always easy to determine whether any of the four holdings related to the second special symbol determination is performed in response to the determination of "small hit", the victory effect with a very high interest Execution is possible.

  Returning to the specific example of the victory effect, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is performed. Is performed, and a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second, for example, is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In response to this, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is “losing”. In addition, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as one second is selected, three small symbols are moved at high speed for one second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. As the second special symbol is rotated and stopped (see FIG. 30 (C)) and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the three small symbols indicating the irregularities (here, “4V2”) whose small and medium symbol is “V” are displayed. The symbol is completely stopped (see FIGS. 30 (D) and 25 (B)). Here, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short at 1 second, the three small symbols indicating the irregularities whose small and medium symbols are “V” are completely stopped without performing a pseudo stop.

During the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving, a reach effect called a challenge battle effect was performed, and when this fluctuation display is completed, the reach loss eye in which the small and medium symbol is “V” (here, The three small symbols indicating "9V9" are finally stopped. On the other hand, when the second special symbol determination corresponding to the hold is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short at 1 second, and the reach effect is performed. Will not be heard. Also, regarding the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, even though the determination result of the corresponding second special symbol determination is “losing”, before the variable display is started. Victory production has begun. For this reason, it can be said that there is no need to perform a reach effect during the change display of the second special symbol.
For this reason, after the three small symbols are rotated at high speed for one second with the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, although the middle symbol indicating "V" is included, it is not a reach-losing eye. The three small symbols (for example, “4V2”) indicating the irregularities are to be permanently stopped (see FIGS. 30D and 25B).

  Note that the victory effect has been performed before the change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started. However, even after the change display ends, the screen display of the victory effect is maintained. (See FIGS. 30A to 30D).

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. The symbol determination is performed, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. In response to this, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the second hold is “losing”. In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are moved at high speed for 1 second with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. The small symbol is rotated (see FIG. 30 (E)), and as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the three small symbols indicating the irregular pattern (here, “5V8”) whose small symbol is “V” are displayed. The symbol is completely stopped (see FIGS. 30 (F) and 25 (B)).

  Note that the victory effect has been performed before the start of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, but the screen display of the victory effect is maintained even after the variable display ends. (See FIGS. 30E to 30F).

  Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is performed. The symbol determination is performed. Here, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”. For this reason, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is not a variation pattern in which the variation time selected in the case of the loss is 1 second, but is, for example, a longer variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 16 seconds. A variation pattern is selected. Then, in response to this, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started, the small symbol display area 53 in the small symbol display area 53 is kept in a state where the screen structure of the winning effect is still maintained. First, high-speed rotation of the symbol is performed (see FIG. 30 (G)).

  When notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is "small hit", the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first rotation is "small hit". It is preferable to perform the same effect as in the latter case in order to make it difficult to distinguish from the case of notifying that there is something.

  For this reason, when the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is performed, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 28C to 28D is performed. Specifically, in a state where the three small symbols are rotated at a high speed as described above with reference to FIG. 30 (G), three decorative symbols indicating the zoro eyes (for example, “666”) are displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50. Perform a pseudo stop. Then, while maintaining the state in which the three small symbols are rotated at high speed, the first movement display of the symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 12B) is started, and the second movement display of the symbol promotion effect (FIG. 12 ( C)), the “777” zoro different from the zigzag moved to the back side (or the same zoro eye as the zoro eye moved to the back side) moves so as to jump out from the back side to the front. As a result, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped at the slot (for example, “777”) indicating the same number (see FIG. 30H). Then, as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the same slot are completely and simultaneously stopped.

  The pseudo stop display of the small symbol is not performed during the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold and during the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. On the other hand, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation and during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold in which the small hit is notified, the pseudo stop display of the small symbol is displayed. Is performed similarly.

[Features of winning performance]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the second special symbol determination relating to the first turn of the time saving that the small hitting game is to be executed, a hit notification effect for notifying that the small hitting game is to be executed is shown in FIG. Winning effects exemplified in FIGS. 28 (B) to 28 (D) are performed. In the present embodiment, the victory effect is configured as a character display of “defeat!” Indicating that the hero character has defeated the enemy character, and an effect display indicating that the hero character who has won the battle is pleased.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hitting game is not executed in the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving (when the determination result is “losing”), examples are illustrated in FIGS. 28B to 28D. There is a feature that a victory effect common to the victory effect is performed (see FIGS. 30A and 30B).

  In addition, during the execution of the victory effect illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B, when notifying that the small hitting game is not executed, it is determined that the small hitting game is executed. In a mode that suggests that the right for special symbol determination is reserved (three small symbols indicating reach-losing eyes including a medium symbol indicating "V"), the small symbols are completely stopped (FIG. 30 ( B)). And, since the final stop of the small symbol indicates a reach loss eye such as “9V9” instead of a double eye, it has a feature as a suggestive effect indicating that the small hit game is not executed. There is also.

  Here, the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit” has been described as an example, but for example, the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold In the case where only the determination result of the symbol determination is "small hit", the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold from the middle of the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of time saving A similar victory effect will be performed so as to straddle at the end of the game.

[About the RUSH challenge battle in the case of five working hours]
Up to this point, if one time saving is awarded, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold, which is a small hit, ends from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving. The RUSH challenge battle that is performed before the game is explained. On the other hand, when five time savings are given, the effect is performed in the following flow. In other words, from the first rotation of the time reduction to the fourth rotation of the time reduction, an effect of individually reporting a hit (small hit or loss) is performed in each of the four times of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Then, for the second special symbol determination of the fifth rotation of the time saving and the four second special symbol determinations held, an effect similar to the above-mentioned RUSH challenge battle performed when one time saving is given is performed. Will be Note that an immediate hit effect (see FIG. 31) to be described later can be executed only on the first rotation of the time saving time, provided that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”.

[Variation about winning performance]
The following configuration may be adopted for the victory effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, by displaying three small symbols indicating the reach-losing eyes (or loose eyes) including the medium symbol indicating "V", the fluctuation is lost, but the small hit is recorded in the remaining hold. It is meant to suggest that something exists. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when there is a small hit in the remaining reservations, three small symbols indicating reach reach eyes (or ragged eyes) that do not include the small symbol indicating “V” May be displayed, for example, a character or a character indicating that there is a small hit in the remaining hold, or control for causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light in a specific light emission pattern may be performed. However, when such a configuration is adopted and the result of the second special symbol determination this time is “small hit”, the display of the character or the character and the frame lamp 37 When the control for emitting light in the light emission pattern is not performed and the result of the second special symbol determination this time is “small hit”, the display of the character or the character and the frame lamp 37 emit light in a specific light emission pattern. It is preferable to carry out control for causing the above.

  Also, in another embodiment, the number indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is usually displayed in blue to indicate that there is a small hit in the reservation without using the small symbol. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the above numbers are displayed in rainbow color when there is a small hit in the hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small and medium symbol indicating “V” is determined to be “small hit” (or “big hit”) in the second special symbol determination during the change display or the stop display of the first special symbol. The small and medium symbols are not displayed during the variation display or the stop display of the second special symbol performed in response to the change. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the small and medium symbol indicating “V” is displayed while the first special symbol is being displayed while being changed or stopped, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” (or “big hit”). )), The small and medium design showing "V" is used as one small design for notifying "losing" during the fluctuation display and the stop display of the second special design performed in response to the change. You may.

[About direct production]
FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the rewind effect performed in the first rotation of the time saving when the number of time savings is set to five times. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 gives five time savings, and then the first special symbol determination result after shifting to the time saving gaming state is “small hit”. In this case, a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol is performed. At this time, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern A in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long as 60 seconds is selected, and in the case where the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively 35 seconds. In some cases, a short variation pattern B is selected. When the variation pattern B is selected, an immediate hit effect having a function as a rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 31).

In addition, since the immediate hit effect is an effect that looks like a small hit immediately after the end of the big hit game, it is not performed if the right related to the second special symbol determination is not reserved at the end of the big hit game. It is preferable to do so.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, and the suspension related to the second special symbol determination is terminated at the end of the big hit game following the small hit game according to the “small hit”. If no, then the game ball wins in the second starting port 12 and the second special symbol determination of the first turn of the time saving is executed, and even if the determination result is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern B is not changed. A configuration that is not selected is adopted. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol determination is “7R time-saving one-time big hit” and the number of time savings is set to one, the right of the second special symbol determination at the end of the big hit game is set as described above. Since it is not suspended, even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation of the time saving becomes “small hit”, the variation pattern B is not selected. That is, no immediate hit effect is performed.

In the gaming machine 1, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving gaming state is "small hit", an effect is performed in the following flow.
That is, at the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol determination, for example, three decorative symbols and three small symbols indicating even-numbered double eyes (for example, “444”) are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 31 (A)). Next, the above-described symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 31 (B)) is performed. However, since the type of the small hit according to the second special symbol determination this time is “5 small hits in 4R time reduction,” After the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols indicating the even-numbered double eyes are pseudo-stopped without changing the numbers of these symbols, these symbols are finally stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 31C).

  On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the main stop, the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game using the big winning port 13 is performed. In the opening period of the big hit game, an opening effect of notifying the type of the small hit and prompting the player to make a right hit is performed (see FIG. 31 (D)). When a long open round game in which the long winning opening 13 is long open is being performed, the number of rounds of the long open round game is reported or the total number of prize balls refunded is displayed during the round. An effect is performed (see FIG. 31E). After that, when the final long opening round game ends and the ending period of the jackpot game ends, an ending effect is performed to notify the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 31 (F)).

  When the big hit game is completed in this way, a time-saving game state in which five time-savings are provided. Here, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, the earliest second special symbol determination among the suspended ones is executed as the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving. . Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” and the variation pattern B of the variation of 35 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed for 35 seconds. As a result, a variable effect using a decorative symbol, a small symbol, or the like is started (see FIGS. 31 (H) and 26 (B)).

  Here, since the variation pattern B with the variation of 35 seconds is selected, the following effects are performed instead of the effects illustrated after FIG. 26C. That is, first, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving, the variable display of three decorative symbols (scroll display of three symbol columns) and the high-speed rotation of three small symbols are started. Is done. Immediately after the change display of these symbols is started, an effect display indicating that noise is generated in the entire image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed. Display. The non-display state of the decorative symbol is maintained until an effect (see FIG. 31 (P)) for pseudo-stopping the zigzag eyes to be described later is started. The effect display indicating the appearance of this noise is performed as a rewind suggestion effect indicating that a rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 31 (I)). Next, the character "NEXT" is displayed, and subsequently, a clock rewind effect is performed in which the hour hand and the hour hand rotate counterclockwise to rewind the time (see FIG. 31 (J)). . An ending rewind effect (see FIG. 31 (L)) for reversely reproducing the ending effect of FIG. 31 (F) and the mid-round effect of FIG. 31 (E) are performed with the clock rewind effect. A background rewind effect during a round in which the background image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is played back in reverse (see FIG. 31 (M)), and an opening rewind effect in which the opening effect shown in FIG. 31 (D) is played back in reverse. (Refer to FIG. 31 (N)) and a symbol promotion rewind effect (see FIG. 31 (O)) in which the symbol promotion effect of FIG. 31 (B) is reproduced in reverse. Note that the rewind effect does not necessarily need to rewind exactly the same video, but does not rewind some of the video if the effect seems to be rewinding. You may.

  FIG. 31 illustrates a case where the instant hit effect does not include the rewind effect related to the small hit game, but in another embodiment, the immediate hit effect includes the rewind effect related to the small hit game. An effect may be performed.

  An immediate hit effect composed of a series of rewind effects of FIGS. 31 (L) to (O) is a series of rewind effects of FIGS. 31 (B) to (F) except for the final stop of the zigzag pattern of FIG. The effect is configured as a rewind effect in which the effect is reversely reproduced at, for example, 8 × speed. Although not shown in the drawing, this immediate hit effect includes a part of the effect used in the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (B) to (F) except for the final stop of the zigzag in FIG. 31 (C). Although the effect images of the common effect contents are used, the display mode is different from those used for the effects of FIGS. 31B to 31F in that all the effect images are expressed in gray. I have.

  Note that in order to make the player feel that a big hit has occurred immediately after the start of the fluctuation effect of FIG. 31 (B), FIGS. ) May be reverse-played at an even faster 16x speed, but if the speed of the reverse playback is too high, a pseudo-sequence effect is performed in which the series of effects appears to be rewound. There is a possibility that the player may not be able to recognize that he is being played. For this reason, it is preferable to set the speed of the reverse reproduction for the rewind effect in consideration of these points.

  As described above, when the symbol promotion rewind effect that constitutes the instant hit effect is performed, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols that indicate the zigzag before the symbol promotion effect is performed are in a state of being pseudo stopped. FIG. 31 (P)). When the two kinds of symbols are pseudo-stopped in this way, a symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 31 (Q)) is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. The two symbols are pseudo-stopped and then stopped completely (see FIG. 31 (R)).

  When the series of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (H) to (Q) are being performed, three small symbols are variably displayed in the small symbol display area 53, and these small symbols are the second special symbols. Since it plays an important role in notifying that the variable display is being performed, a rewind effect for these three small symbols is not performed when an immediate hit effect is performed.

  Hereinafter, the internal configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the processing performed by the gaming machine 1 for implementing the game control and effects described above will be described.

[Configuration Example of Main RAM 103]
FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 32A, the main RAM 103 includes a determination storage area 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, and a fourth reserved storage area 1034. , A first reserved storage area 1035, a second reserved storage area 1036, a third reserved storage area 1037, and a fourth reserved storage area 1038.

  The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas for storing various information related to the first special symbol determination. The first on-hold storage area 1035 to the fourth on-hold storage area 1038 are storage areas for storing various information related to the second special symbol determination.

  As illustrated in FIG. 32 (B), the holding storage areas 1031 to 1034 are areas for storing a jackpot random number acquired by the main CPU 101 in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 11. , An area for storing jackpot symbol random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing variable pattern random numbers, and an area for storing advance determination information.

  This pre-judgment information is information obtained by a pre-judgment process (see step S218 in FIG. 35), which will be described later, based on the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number according to the first special symbol determination. . The pre-judgment information is, specifically, information indicating whether or not the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot. If the judgment result is a jackpot, information indicating the type of the jackpot, The information includes information indicating a symbol variation pattern, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The preliminary determination information is stored in the same holding storage area as the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number used in the preliminary determination process.

  As illustrated in FIG. 32 (C), each of the hold storage areas 1035 to 1038 is an area for storing a jackpot random number acquired by the main CPU 101 in response to a game ball winning in the second starting port 12. , An area for storing a big hit symbol random number, an area for storing a small hit symbol random number, an area for storing a reach random number, an area for storing a fluctuation pattern random number, and an area for storing advance determination information.

  This pre-judgment information is based on a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a small symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number according to the second special symbol judgment, and is performed by a preliminary judgment process (see step S229 in FIG. 36) described later. Information that can be obtained. The advance determination information is, specifically, information indicating whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and in the case of a big hit, what kind of the big hit is. The information includes information indicating the type of the small hit, information indicating the type of the small hit, information indicating a variation pattern of the second special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The preliminary determination information is stored in the same holding storage area as the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number used in the preliminary determination process.

  The five pieces of information described based on FIG. 32 (B) are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 every time a game ball wins in the first starting port 11. Stored in either. For example, when five pieces of information relating to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where information is not stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the five pieces of information are: It is stored in the first hold storage area 1031. Further, for example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, respectively, the five pieces of information are obtained. Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

  When the reserved first special symbol determination is exhausted, the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is performed. Information stored in the reserved storage areas subsequent to the second reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, if the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 while the information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the second The information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

  When the reserved second special symbol determination is exhausted, the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the second special symbol determination is performed. You. Then, information stored in the reserved storage areas after the second reserved storage area 1036 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1035 side.

  By the way, even when the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed or during the big hit game, even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12) and various random numbers are obtained, the special symbol determination and the special symbol are determined. It is not possible to immediately display the symbol change.

  For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired in such a situation, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired various random numbers and the like in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 as the right of the first special symbol determination, as described above. It is to be stored or stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 as the right of the second special symbol determination. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a fluctuating manner, the special symbol determination is not suspended, and the jackpot game is not being performed, the main CPU 101 obtains various random numbers and the like acquired at the time of starting opening winning. It is stored directly in the determination storage area 1030. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers obtained when the game ball has won the first starting port 11 in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the storage areas 1031 to 1034. Further, various random numbers acquired when the game ball has won the second starting port 12 are stored in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the hold storage areas 1035 to 1038.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when both the right of the first special symbol determination and the right of the second special symbol determination are reserved, the configuration for preferentially using the right of the second special symbol determination is used. Has been adopted. Therefore, when the information related to the suspension of the first special symbol determination is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 and the information related to the suspension of the second special symbol determination is stored in the first reserved storage area 1035, The process of shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the determination storage area 1030 has priority over the processing of shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the determination storage area 1030. And executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly performs a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 33 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during a normal operation excluding a special case such as a power-on or a power-off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 33 and thereafter is performed in accordance with a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number updating process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a small symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the ordinary symbol random number are incremented by “1” each time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the process of step S1, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (step S2). This switching process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination, and displays the result of the special symbol determination after variably displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the judgment symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol determination, includes a process of displaying a normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying a normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination, and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the slide member control that operates the slide member 17 via the slide member control unit 113. The process is executed (Step S5). This slide member control processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines in the special symbol processing in step S3 that it is a small hit, a small winning prize for executing a small hitting game including an open game using the small winning prize port 19 is performed. A mouth opening control process is executed (step S6). The small winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a large hit has occurred in step S3, or if the game ball has passed the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the large winning opening control unit 116 A special winning opening opening control process for controlling and opening the special winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling payout of a prize ball according to a winning of a game ball (step S8).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits the various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the processing steps before step S8 and information necessary for determining the effect contents to the effect control board 130. The process is executed (Step S9). By executing the processing in step S9, game information relating to special symbol determination and special games is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the game information includes a hold command, a change start command, a symbol determination command, a big hit opening command, a small hit opening command, a round start command, an ending command, a small winning opening opening command, and a V winning as described later. Commands.

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Following the processing in step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 as illustrated in FIG. For a random number (jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), a first start-up switch processing is performed to obtain a value at the time when the detection signal is input from the first start-up switch 111 (step). S21). This first start-up switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, For the reach random number and the variation pattern random number), a second start-up switch process for acquiring a value at the time when the detection signal is input from the second start-up switch 112 is executed (step S22). This second starting port switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114, and obtains the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, for the ordinary symbol random number appropriately updated by the process of step S1. A gate switch process is performed (step S23). This gate switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[First starting port switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the first startup port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 35, following the random number updating process in step S1, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 (specifically, the first starting port switch 111 is turned “ON”). It is determined whether or not the first start-up port switch 111 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not an ON signal indicating that this has been done (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S210: YES), the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether the number is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S211).

  When determining that the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1 (step S211: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S212) and the first special symbol. A jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired as acquisition information used for the determination, and these random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103 in association with each other (steps S213 to S216).

  As described above, various acquisition information such as a jackpot random number is acquired in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first starting port switch 111 is turned “ON” in a state where the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1. When various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the change display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. In the case where various random numbers are obtained in step (1), these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (in this embodiment, the time reduction game state) (step S217). The main RAM 103 stores a time reduction game flag. In this case, the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF” when the slide member 17 is operated in an operation pattern in which the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 12 when the normal symbol lottery is won, and conversely, 2 This flag is set to “ON” when the slide member 17 is operated in an operation pattern in which a game ball easily wins in the starting port 12. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time reduction game flag is set to “OFF”, the main CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process (step S218). Specifically, prior to a jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) and a variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41) described later, whether or not a jackpot is determined based on the acquired information obtained in the processes of steps S213 to S216. In addition to the pre-determination, a pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is performed. This pre-determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

If the main CPU 101 has executed the process of step S218 or determined that the game is in the high base state (the time reduction game flag is set to “ON”) (step S217: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This suspension command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S8.
When the process proceeds to step S219 following the process of step S218, a hold command including the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S218 is transmitted to effect control board 130.

[Second starting port switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the second startup port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 36, following the first start-up switch processing in step S21, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start-up switch 112 (specifically, the second start-up switch 112 is set to “ON”). It is determined whether or not the second start-up switch 112 has been turned "ON" based on whether or not an "ON signal indicating that the second starting port switch has been turned ON" has been input (step S220).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S220: YES), the number of reservations U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether the number is less than the maximum reserved number Umax2 (“4” in the present embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S221).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number U2 is less than the maximum reserved number Umax2 (step S221: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the reserved number U2 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S222), and the second special symbol The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired as the acquisition information used for the determination, and the random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103 in association with each other (steps S223 to S227). ).

  In the case where various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the change display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. In the case where various random numbers are obtained in step (1), these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S227, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current state is the high base state, as in the processing of step S217 (step S228). Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S228: YES), that is, when the time reduction game flag is set to “ON”, a preliminary determination process is executed (step S229). This pre-determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S229 or determines that the game is not in the high base state (the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF”) (step S228: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the second special symbol. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S230). This suspension command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S8.
When the process proceeds to step S230 following the process of step S229, a hold command including the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S229 is transmitted to effect control board 130.

[Prior judgment processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the pre-determination processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination processing in steps S218 and S229 of FIGS.

  The main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process when it is determined in the process of step S217 in FIG. 35 that the vehicle is not in the high base state, or when it is determined in the process of step S228 in FIG. 36 that the vehicle is in the high base state (step S2181). ). Specifically, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 11 is a winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change, based on whether or not it matches (see FIG. 6A). When the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball has won the second starting port 12 is the winning value for the jackpot stored in the main ROM 102 and the jackpot for the small jackpot. Based on whether or not one of the winning values is matched, it is determined whether or not a big hit is determined at the start of the change, or whether or not a small hit is determined at the start of the change.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change based on the determination result of step S2181 (step S2182). Here, if it is determined that a big hit is determined at the start of the change (step S2182: YES), the big hit change pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182: NO), based on the determination result of step S2181, it is determined that the small hit is made at the start of the change. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2184). Here, if it is determined that the small hit is determined at the start of the change (step S2184: YES), the small hit change pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2185).
When the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved and the acquired big hit random number matches the winning value corresponding to the small hit, the process proceeds to step S2185. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a small hit, if the first special symbol determination is suspended and “NO” is determined in step S2182, this step is performed. The process proceeds to step S2186 instead of S2185.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not determined to be a small hit at the start of the change (step S2184: NO), that is, the determination result of the held first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is “lost”. Is determined, whether or not a reach effect is performed during the fluctuation (step S2186). Specifically, based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether or not a reach effect is performed during the change.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2186: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187).

  By the way, if the determination result of the special symbol determination is "losing" and the reach effect is not performed during the change, especially the first special symbol determination is based on the number of special symbol determinations held at the start of the change. Thus, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. The reserved number of the first special symbol determination may be different before and after the retained special symbol determination is consumed. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the special symbol determination is exhausted may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the special symbol determination is actually exhausted. That is, for the right of the special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, there is a possibility that an accurate special pattern fluctuation pattern cannot be acquired prior to the special symbol determination.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2186: NO), the process proceeds to step S2189 without performing the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2188 described later.

  When the large hit variation pattern table, the small hit variation pattern table, or the reach variation pattern table is set, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern random number determination process (step S2188). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of starting opening prize together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is a random number value defined in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. A variation pattern of a special symbol to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified based on which random value matches.

  When executing the process of step S2188 or determining that the reach effect is not performed (step S2186: NO), the main CPU 101 generates advance determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2189). The area where the pre-determination information is stored is as described above with reference to FIGS. 32 (B) and 32 (C).

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines a jackpot based on the acquired information based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12). Prior to performing the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the determination result of the reserved first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) and the variation pattern of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) And get.

[Gate switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S24 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 38, following the second start-up switch processing of step S22, the main CPU 101 detects a detection signal from the gate switch 114 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON”). It is determined whether or not the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not has been input (step S241).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” (step S241: YES), the number T of ordinary symbol judgments stored in the main RAM 103 is the number of ordinary symbols stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether the number is less than the maximum number of determinations Tmax (for example, “4”) (step S242).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holds T is less than the maximum number of holds Tmax (step S242: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of holds T to “1” (step S243), and holds the data by this processing. An ordinary symbol random number used for the ordinary symbol determination is obtained and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S244).

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a big hit game is being performed based on whether or not the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S300). The jackpot game flag is a flag that is stored in the main RAM 103 and indicates whether the jackpot game is being executed or not, and is set to “ON” at the start of the jackpot game and to “OFF” at the end of the jackpot game. Is set. Here, when it is determined that a big hit game is being played (step S300: YES), the process proceeds to a normal symbol process of step S4.

  When determining that the small hit game is not being performed (step S300: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the small hit game is being performed based on whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON”. (Step S301). The small hitting game flag is a flag stored in the main RAM 103 and indicating whether or not the small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting game flag is set to “ON” at the start of the small hitting game, and is set at the end of the small hitting game. It is set to “OFF”. Here, when it is determined that the small hit game is being performed (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game is not being performed (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is being changed and displayed (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being fluctuated and displayed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the reserved number U2 is equal to or more than “1” (step S303: YES), the reserved number U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S304).

  When determining that the reserved number U2 is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is equal to or greater than “1”. Is determined (step S305). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U1 is equal to or more than “1” (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S306).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S304 or the processing of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift processing for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when executing the shift process following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the second special symbol determination hold storage areas 1035 to 1038. And the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side. When the shift process is executed subsequent to the process in step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first special symbol determination hold storage regions 1031 to 1034 is shifted to the determination storage region 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

Subsequent to the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the first special symbol determination is a jackpot or not, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is determined. In the second special symbol determination, it is determined whether or not a big hit and a small hit, and when it is determined to be a big hit, a type of the big hit is determined and it is determined that the small hit is made. In this case, the type of the small hit is determined.
Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. This big hit determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern selection processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S310, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol setting information set in the processing of step S309, whether the special symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A change start command including information indicating whether the change is related, setting information of the change pattern set in the process of step S310, information on the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

  This change start command is a command for instructing the start of an effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the variable display using the decorative design or the like on the liquid crystal screen 5 is started.

  Subsequent to the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol change display based on the change pattern setting information included in the change start command set in step S311 (step S312). At this time, if the processing of steps S309 to S311 is performed in a state where the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030, the first special symbol display 41 Start the special symbol change display. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S309 to S311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the variation display of the special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 42. I do.

  Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

  If the main CPU 101 has executed the processing of step S313 or determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the processing of step S310 from the start of the measurement of the fluctuating time in step S313. It is determined whether the fluctuation time corresponding to the changed fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the ordinary symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuating time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, a process or the like of permanently stopping the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, or lost symbol) set in the processing of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device that has variably displayed the special symbol. This special symbol stop display is continued at least until a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, one second) elapses.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 and then displays the special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the fluctuation time started to be measured in the process of step S313 (step S318), and starts a jackpot game when a big hit occurs, or a case where a small hit occurs. (Step S319) including a process of starting a small hitting game. This processing during suspension will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Big hit determination process by game control board 100]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. Following the shift processing in step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination as illustrated in FIG. 40 (step S3071). Specifically, when the shift process of shifting the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 32B) to the determination storage area 1030 is performed, the shifted jackpot random number is Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit (one type) is based on whether or not the winning value of the big hit random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches (see FIG. 6A). Here, if it matches the winning value, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it does not match the winning value, it is determined to be a loss.
On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of shifting the acquired information such as the jackpot random number related to the second special symbol determination (see FIG. 32C) to the determination storage area 1030, the shifted jackpot random number Is a big hit (per type) or a small hit (per two types) based on whether or not any of the winning values of the jackpot random numbers stored in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 6B) match. It is determined whether or not. As exemplified in FIG. 6 (B), a winning value corresponding to the big hit and a winning value corresponding to the small hit are prepared as the winning value of the big hit random number, and match the winning value of the former. In this case, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it matches the latter winning value, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the current special symbol determination is a big hit (one type) based on the determination result of step S3071 (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3072: YES), the type of the jackpot is determined (step S3073). More specifically, a symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6C is stored in the main ROM 102. When the main CPU 101 determines that a big hit has occurred, the main CPU 101 reads out the symbol determination table from the main ROM 102 and Set in the RAM 103. In this symbol determination table, as described above with reference to FIG. 6 (C), the random number value for each of “7R time-short one-time jackpot”, “7R time-short five-time jackpot”, and “7R time-short 100 hits” Are associated with each other. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot symbol random number shifted to the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S3071 is a random number value corresponding to any of the above three types of jackpots. And determine the type of jackpot based on whether it matches.

  The main CPU 101 sets a jackpot symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in the processing of step S3073 in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3074). Thereby, at the time of the process of step S317, the big hit symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), and the big hit is notified. Become. When the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol determination is performed in step S3071, the set jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and in step S3071 the jackpot relating to the second special symbol determination is performed. When the determination is made, the set big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit is not a big hit (step S3072: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a small hit (two hits) based on the determination result of the step S3071 (step S3076). Here, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (step S3076: NO), a losing symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3077). As a result, in the process of step S317, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), and the loss is notified. Become.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit (step S3076: YES), it determines the type of the small hit (step S3078). Specifically, a symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6D is stored in the main ROM 102, and the main CPU 101 reads out the symbol determination table from the main ROM 102 when it is determined that a small hit is made. Set in the main RAM 103. In this symbol determination table, as described above with reference to FIG. 6 (D), each of “4R time reduction 5 times small hit”, “12R time reduction 5 times small hit”, and “16R time reduction 5 times small hit” Are associated with random numbers. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit symbol random number shifted to the determination storage area 1030 together with the large hit random number used in the processing of step S3071 corresponds to any of the above three types of small hits. The type of the small hit is determined based on whether or not the random number value matches.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets a small hit symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in the process of step S3078 in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3079). As a result, in the process of step S317, the small hit symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the small hit is notified.
In the present embodiment, since a small hit is not prepared for the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6A), the small hit symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Absent.

[Variable pattern selection processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. After executing the big hit determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination this time is “big hit” as in the process of step S3072 (step S3101). . Here, if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3101: YES), the jackpot variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), similarly to the processing of step S3076, it determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination this time is “small hit” (step S3107). Step S3013). Here, when it is determined that the result of the current special symbol determination is “small hit” (step S3013: YES), the small hit variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). .

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination this time is not “small hit” (step S3013: NO), the determination storage area 1030 is used together with the big hit random number used for the big hit determination in step S3071. Is determined based on whether or not the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, whether or not to perform a reach effect that expects the player to win a big hit is determined. (Step S3105). If it is determined that a reach effect is to be performed (step S3105: YES), the reach variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3106). Conversely, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3105: NO), the loss variation table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3107).

  Then, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern random number determination processing with reference to the fluctuation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the processing of step S3102, the processing of step S3104, the processing of step S3106, or the processing of step S3107 (step S3108). Specifically, when the large hit variation pattern table, the small hit variation pattern table, or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030. The variation pattern is selected by reading the pattern from the variation pattern table that is set.

  Also, when the loss variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is performed based on the number of reserved storage areas in which various types of information are stored immediately before the shift processing in step S308 is performed. A change pattern is selected by specifying the number of reservations for the special symbol determination) and reading a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations and the presence or absence of the current time saving from the loss fluctuation pattern table.

  By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this manner, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

  When selecting the variation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S3109). The change pattern setting information is included in the change start command together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the above-described jackpot determination processing in step S309 and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

[Stop processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the in-stop processing in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the fluctuation time by the process of step S318, as shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination this time is a big hit (per type), as in the process of step S3072. Is determined (step S3191). Here, if it is determined that the big hit is (step S3191: YES), the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3192).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3193). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the time reduction gaming state. Here, when it is determined that the time reduction game flag is set to “ON” (step S3193: YES), the time reduction game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3194). As a result, the gaming state during the jackpot game becomes the normal gaming state, and even if the player makes a right strike in order to complete the jackpot game, basically, the game ball will not win the second starting port 12. For this reason, the right to determine the second special symbol is not suspended during the jackpot game.

  Then, when executing the process of step S3194 or determining that the time-saving game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3193: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the big hit opening command in the main RAM 103 (step S3193: NO). Step S3195). The jackpot opening command is a command for notifying that the opening period before the opening game for opening the special winning opening 13 according to one kind is started is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S9. Sent.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result of the current special symbol determination is not a big hit (per one type) (step S3191: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the current determination result of the special symbol determination is a small hit (per two types). Is determined (step S3197). Here, when it is determined that the small hit is made (step S3197: YES), the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3198), and the time saved in the main RAM 103 is also set. The game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3199).

  By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, "small hit" is determined only in the second special symbol determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination. Then, in the normal game state, since the game ball does not win at the second starting port 12, basically, the small hit occurs only in the time reduction game state. That is, the small hit basically occurs only when the time-saving game flag is set to “ON”. Therefore, here, the process of setting the time saving game flag to “OFF” in step S3199 is performed without performing the same determination as in step S3193.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3199, the main CPU 101 sets a small hit opening command in the main RAM 103 (step S3200). The small hit opening command is a command for notifying that an opening period (OP period in FIG. 21) starts before an opening game for opening the small winning opening 19 according to two types of wins starts. It is transmitted to effect control board 130 by the transmission process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (step S3197: NO), that is, when the determination result of the current special symbol determination is “losing”, the time-saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ It is determined whether or not “ON” is set (step S3202). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3202: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the remaining time saving game number J is set (step S3203). This time saving game remaining number of times J indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination is executed in the time saving game state, and in the game state setting process performed when the big hit game ends, the timing of the execution of the big hit game Is set to “1” times, “5” times, or “100” times depending on the type of the big hit (or the small hit). In contrast, in step S3203, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the remaining number of hours saving game J is set based on whether or not the remaining number of hours saving game J is a value other than “0”. .

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the remaining time saving game number J is set (step S3203: YES), that is, if the remaining time saving game number J is a value other than “0”, the current “losing” is the second. It is determined whether or not the loss is related to the special symbol determination (step S3204). Here, if it is determined that the current "losing" is a loss related to the second special symbol determination, the number of time saving game remaining times J is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3205). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining time saving game number J is “0” (step S3206). If it is determined that the remaining time saving game number J is “0” (step S3206: YES), the time saving game flag is set. Is set to “OFF” (step S3207).

  By the way, the processing of step S3205 to step S3207 is performed when the result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is “losing”. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6 and the like, one, five, or 100 time savings are given according to the type of big hit or small hit, but once In the case of, at the end of the big hit game, the remaining time saving game number J is set to “1” by the processing of step S7454 (see FIG. 48) described later. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is “losing”, the variation display of the second special symbol performed according to the second special symbol determination is performed. At the end timing, the process proceeds to step S3205. As a result, the number of remaining time-saving games J becomes “0”, and the process proceeds to step S3207 so as to end the time-saving gaming state under the first ending condition for one time-saving game illustrated in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the case of five time savings, at the end of the big hit game, the remaining time savings game number J is set to “5” by the processing of step S7456 (see FIG. 48) described later. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is “losing”, the variation display of the second special symbol performed according to the second special symbol determination is performed. At the end timing, the process proceeds to step S3205. Then, when this series of processing is repeated five times, the remaining time-saving game number J becomes “0”, and in order to end the time-saving gaming state under the first ending condition for the five time-saving games illustrated in FIG. The process proceeds to step S3207.

  When executing the process of step S3207, when determining that the number of remaining time saving games J is not set (step S3203: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the current special symbol determination is not the second special symbol determination. In this case (step S3204: NO), or when it is determined that the number of remaining time-saving games J is not “0” (step S3206: NO), “1” is subtracted from the total number of remaining time-saving determinations G stored in the main RAM 102. The value is updated (step S3208). The total number of remaining time reductions G indicates the number of remaining times in which the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the time saving game state. In the case of one time reduction or five time reductions, " It is set to "12", and is set to "100" in the case of 100 time savings (see FIG. 48).

  Subsequent to the process of step S3208, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of remaining time saving determination times G is “0” (step S3209). Here, when it is determined that the total remaining number of times G for determination of time saving is “0” (step S3209: YES), the time saving game flag is set to “OFF” to end the time saving game state (step S3210).

  As is clear from the notation in FIG. 42, the special symbol determination is executed while the game is being controlled in the time-saving gaming state, and when the determination result is “losing”, the special symbol determination is performed in the second symbol. Regardless of whether it is the special symbol determination or the first special symbol determination, the process of step S3208 is always executed. For this reason, in the time-saving game state, the total time-saving judgment residual is obtained both when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing” and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”. The number of times G is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”. When the total number of remaining time saving determinations G becomes “0”, the process proceeds to step S3210, and the time saving gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, for one time reduction or five time reductions, the total number of time saving determination remaining times G is set to “12” at the end of the jackpot, but the second special symbol determination (or the first special The process of step S3208 is performed each time the determination result of "symbol determination" becomes "losing", and when the number of times of execution of this process reaches twelve, each of the one time reduction and five time reductions illustrated in FIG. The process is advanced to step S3210 in order to end the time-saving gaming state with the second end condition for.

  On the other hand, the same applies to the case where the number of time savings is 100, and the initial value of the total remaining number of times G for determination of time savings is “100”. The process proceeds to step S3210 in order to end the time-saving gaming state under the end condition for the 100 time-savings that have been performed.

[Normal symbol processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the ordinary symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. As exemplified in FIG. 43, following the special symbol processing of step S3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the auxiliary game is being performed in which the operation of returning to the storage position a predetermined number of times after maintaining the state in which the slide member 17 is disposed at the guide position for the predetermined time is performed during the auxiliary game. Is set to “ON”, and is set to “OFF” when the auxiliary game is not being performed.

  When it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the guide member control process in step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display unit 45 is displaying the variation of the ordinary symbol (step S402). ), When it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the reserved number T of the ordinary symbol determination is “1” or more (step S403). Here, when it is determined that the number of holds T is not equal to or more than “1” (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the guide member control process of step S5.

  When determining that the number of holds T is equal to or more than “1” (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of holds T by subtracting “1” (step S404), and executes a hit random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, the earliest ordinary symbol random number among the ordinary symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the processing in the above step S244 (see FIG. 38) is a winning related to the ordinary symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the result of the ordinary symbol determination is a hit based on whether or not the value matches any of the values.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the ordinary symbol determination is a win based on the result of the determination in step S405 (step S406). Step S406: YES), the hit symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). Conversely, when it is determined that the result of the ordinary symbol determination is not a hit (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

  If the current game state is the “normal game state” in step S407, the main CPU 101 notifies the slide member 17 that it operates in the operation pattern shown in step S504 (see FIG. 44). The symbol is set in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”, a winning symbol notifying that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44) is set in the main RAM 103.

  For this reason, even if the game state changes after these winning symbols are set and before the change display of the ordinary symbols ends, the slide member 17 operates in an operation pattern according to the set winning symbols. That is, for example, a hit symbol for notifying that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44) is set during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state during that time, and the hit symbol that has been set is stopped and displayed thereafter, the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44). become. In other words, even if the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state between the time when the winning symbol is set and the time when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, in the normal gaming state, step S505 (FIG. The slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the time saving game state based on whether the time saving game flag is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S409). Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving gaming state (step S409: NO), the ordinary symbol variation time for causing the ordinary symbol display 45 to vary the ordinary symbol is set to, for example, 8 seconds (step S410). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (step S411). The normal symbol variation time set by the processing of step S410 or step S411 in this manner is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to start displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display (step S413). ).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variable display of the normal symbol is being displayed by the normal symbol display 45 (step S402: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether to end the variable display of the normal symbol (step S415). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time at which the measurement is started in the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411, whether to end the variation display of the ordinary symbol is determined. Is determined. Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is not to be ended (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the guide member control process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of the normal symbol is to be ended (step S415: YES), the main CPU 101 terminates the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 45, and is set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S407. The winning symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). Then, the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the processing of step S413 is reset (step S417). Next, similarly to the processing in step S406, it is determined whether or not the result of the ordinary symbol determination is a hit (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination is a hit (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S419). By setting the auxiliary game flag to “ON” in this manner, the auxiliary game for moving the slide member 17 to the guide position is started.

[Slide member control processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the slide member control process in step S5 of FIG. Subsequent to the ordinary symbol processing of step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step S501). Here, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the small winning opening opening control process of step S6.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the slide member 17 is operating (step S502). When it is determined that the slide member 17 is not operating (step S502: NO), the hit symbol stopped and displayed in the process of step S416 corresponds to the time-saving game state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second starting port 12. Operating the slide member 17 in an operating pattern that informs that the slide member 17 is to be operated in an operating pattern to be performed or that corresponds to a normal game state in which a game ball is not guided to the second starting port 12. It is determined whether the symbol is a non-work time saving symbol for notifying the user (step S503). Here, when it is determined that the stop-displayed hit symbol is not the time-saving hit symbol (step S503: NO), the operation pattern of the slide member 17 is 0 after moving the slide member 17 from the storage position to the guide position. An operation pattern for performing one operation of returning to the storage position after 0.036 seconds is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). Conversely, when it is determined that the stop-displayed hit symbol is a time-saving hit symbol (step S503: YES), the operation pattern of the slide member 17 is set to 1 after moving the slide member 17 from the storage position to the guide position. An operation pattern in which the operation of returning to the storage position after .92 seconds is performed twice at intervals of 0.5 seconds is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

  After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or S505, the main CPU 101 causes the slide member control unit 113 to start the operation of the slide member 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

  When executing the process of step S506 or determining that the slide member 17 is operating (step S502: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the operation of the slide member 17 started in the process of step S506 is completed. It is determined whether or not it is (step S507). Here, when it is determined that the operation of the slide member 17 has been completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (step S508). Thereby, the auxiliary game is ended.

<Auxiliary games before and after the time-saving gaming state ends>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the number of time savings is set to one, a total of five second special symbol determinations of one second special symbol determination and four reserved second special symbol determinations are performed. It has the game property of attracting "small hits" in any of the symbol determinations.
On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation is completed and the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, the number of reserves of the second special symbol determination is determined. U2 becomes “3”. Therefore, at this time, if the auxiliary game of the slide member 17 corresponding to the time saving game state (the above-described operation of releasing 1.92 seconds × 2) is performed, the right of the sixth second special symbol determination is granted. There is a risk of causing this. The same applies to a case where five time savings are given.

  For this reason, in order to suppress the above-mentioned problem from occurring, in the present embodiment, when the number of time savings is set to one, the gaming state is changed at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation is completed. A structure is adopted in which the time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state (see FIG. 25), and the fixed time during which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set to 10 seconds, which is relatively long, in accordance with the variable display. ing.

  For example, if the normal symbol determination is executed immediately before the end of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation (for example, 0.1 seconds before), the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. The symbol is set in the main RAM 103. Then, the ordinary symbol fluctuates for 0.5 seconds (see step S411 in FIG. 43), and as the ordinary symbol stops at the symbol corresponding to the time reduction, the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position for 1.92 seconds, The auxiliary game is finished after the member 17 is placed at the storage position for 0.5 seconds and the slide member 17 is again placed at the guide position for 1.92 seconds. Therefore, the total time from the start of the variable symbol display until the end of the auxiliary game is 4.84 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.92 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.92 seconds).

  As is clear from the description so far, even if the symbol is normally determined and the symbol is set per time reduction corresponding to 0.1 second before the time reduction game state ends, the above-described determination time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, a series of auxiliary games ends before the determined time elapses. Until this fixed time elapses, the number of reserves U2 for the second special symbol determination remains at “4”, so even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 12 according to the auxiliary game. The right of the sixth special symbol determination does not occur.

  In addition, since the time reduction game state is set after the change display of the second special symbol in the first rotation is completed, even if the auxiliary game is performed along with the normal symbol determination being held and exhausted, the slide member is formed by one auxiliary game. Since 17 is placed at the guide position only for 0.036 seconds, the game ball does not win the second starting port 12. That is, the right of the sixth second special symbol determination does not occur.

[Small winning opening opening / closing control processing by the game control board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the small hit game is executed by the small winning opening opening control process in step S6. Hereinafter, the small winning opening opening / closing control processing executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the small winning opening control process in step S6 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the guide member control process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the small hitting game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 45 (step S600). Here, when it is determined that the small hitting game flag is not set to “ON” (step S600: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening opening control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hitting game flag is set to “ON” (step S600: YES), for example, the elapsed time after setting the small hitting opening command in the process of step S3200 is set in advance. Based on whether or not the set opening time has been reached, it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period of the small hit game (step S601). Here, when it is determined that it is during the opening period (step S601: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (step S602). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S602: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S602: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the winning number X of the game balls to the small winning opening 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S603). The control of opening the small winning opening 19 by the control unit 118 (that is, the operation of the slide member 191 in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21)) is started (step S604), and a small winning opening opening command is set in the main RAM 103. (Step S605).

  This small winning opening opening command is a command for notifying that the opening game of the small hitting game described above with reference to FIG. 21 has been started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S9. The effect control board 130 can identify the timing at which the opening game is started by receiving the small winning opening opening command, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 even after seven seconds have elapsed from this timing. If not, the remaining time countdown display described above with reference to FIG. 21 is started.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 45, following the processing of step S605, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the opening control of step S604 (step S606).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the opening period in the small hitting game (step S601: NO), for example, the ending time at which the measurement is started in the processing of step S621 described later ends from the start of the ending period. It is determined whether or not the small hitting game is ending based on whether or not the predetermined time until has elapsed (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending in the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the small winning opening switch 194 is turned “ON” based on the presence / absence of the detection signal from the small winning opening switch 194. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the small winning opening switch 194 has been turned “ON” (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the small winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the gaming ball is determined. The value is updated to the value obtained by adding "1" (step S610).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S610, determines that the small winning opening switch 194 is not “ON” (step S609: NO), or executes the processing of step S606, the V winning opening switch 198 It is determined whether or not the V winning opening switch 198 has been turned “ON” based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the V winning port switch 198 has been turned “ON” (step S611: YES), the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S612). Here, the V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small winning game (that is, whether or not the V winning has been achieved), and the small winning game starts. Before the game is performed, it is set to “OFF”, and when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 198, it is set to “ON”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 103 (step S613). This V winning command is a command for notifying that a game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hitting game, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. Therefore, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can specify that the gaming ball has passed the V winning opening switch 198 by receiving the V winning command.

  If the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S613 or determines that the V winning opening switch 198 is not “ON” (step S611: NO), the winning number X of the game ball with respect to the small winning opening 19 is “9”. Is determined (step S614). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning number X that increases by “1” reaches “9” every time the process of step S610 is repeated. Here, when it is determined that the winning number X of the game balls matches "9" (step S614: YES), a loss winning opening opening control for opening the loss winning opening 197 is executed (step S615). That is, by operating the slide member 195 via the loss winning opening opening / closing section 119, the loss winning opening 197 is opened (see FIGS. 2B and 2C).

  When executing the process of step S615 or determining that the winning number X of the game ball does not match “9” (step S614: NO), the main CPU 101 performs the specified opening operation of the slide member 191 (the operation of the slide member 191). It is determined whether or not the operation in a predetermined opening pattern has been completed (step S616). Here, when it is determined that the specified opening operation has not been completed (step S616: NO), the winning number X is determined to be the number of game balls Xmax (“10” in the present embodiment) that defines the closing timing of the small winning opening 19. It is determined whether they match (step S617). Here, when it is determined that the winning number X does not match the gaming ball number Xmax (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening control process of step S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number X matches the game ball number Xmax (step S617: YES), or determines that the prescribed opening operation has been completed (step S616: YES), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of step S604. The opening control of the small winning opening 19 that has been started is terminated (step S618), the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the processing of step S606 is reset (step S619), and the measurement of the ending time is started (step S620).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game is ending (step S608: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. 46 (step S622). Specifically, the main ROM 102 stores time information indicating the length of time from the start of the ending period to the end thereof, and the main CPU 101 determines the ending time at which the measurement was started in the processing of step S621. Determines whether the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the time indicated by the time information has been reached.

  When determining that the ending time has elapsed (step S622: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hitting game flag to “OFF” (step S623). As a result, the small hit game ends. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S624). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S624: YES), the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S625), and the V winning flag is set to “OFF”. (Step S626).

If the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hitting game, the process of the above step S612 (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the V winning flag is set to “ON”. For this reason, the big hit game flag of step S625 is set to “ON” at the timing when the small hit game ends, and the big hit game in which the round game after the second round is completed using the big winning port 13 is started. Become.
On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the process of step S612 is not executed, and the small hitting game is performed with the V winning flag set to “OFF”. End timing (timing when the ending period of the small hit game ends). For this reason, "NO" is determined in the determination process of step S624, and as a result, the process of setting the big hit game flag to "ON" in step S625 is not performed. For this reason, the second and subsequent round games using the special winning opening 13 are not performed. Also, in this case, since the gaming state setting process of step S745 (see FIG. 47) for shifting the gaming state to the “time saving gaming state” is not performed, the game may shift to the time saving gaming state after the small hitting game is completed. Absent.

[Big winning opening opening control processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S720). This jackpot game flag is the processing of step S3192 (see FIG. 42) executed in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), or the V winning flag is " It is set to “ON” by the process of step S625 (see FIG. 46) executed in response to the setting of “ON”. Here, if it is determined that the big hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S720: NO), the processing proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

  When determining that the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S720: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit game is in the opening period (step S721). Specifically, for example, during the opening period based on whether or not the elapsed time since the opening command related to the jackpot game has been set by the processing of step S3195 (see FIG. 42) has reached a predetermined opening time. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When determining that the opening period is in progress (step S721: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time has elapsed based on whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time (step S721). Step S722). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern of the special winning opening control unit 116, and stores these information in the main RAM 103. (Step S723). By executing the processing in step S723, various times related to long hit games, such as an interval time between a round and the next round, and an ending time after the end of the last round, are also set.

  In the present embodiment, three types of “big hits (one hit per type)”, “big hits with 7R time savings 5 times”, and “big hits with 7R time savings of 100 times” are prepared ( If these jackpots are won, the process of step S3192 (see FIG. 42) sets the jackpot game flag to "ON", and in any case, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "7". Is set.

  On the other hand, as the types of small hits (per two types), three types of "4R short time five small hits", "12R short time five small hits", and "16R short time 100 small hits" are prepared ( The big hit game flag is set to “ON” by the processing of step S625 (see FIG. 46) and step S625 (see FIG. 46). That is, after the open game constituting the small hit game is performed, the big hit game flag is set to “ON”. For this reason, in the case of winning the "5R small hits of 4R 5 times", the number of rounds Rmax is set to "3", which is one round less, and in the case of winning of "12R 5 times small hits of the time," the number of rounds Rmax is 1 If the number of rounds is set to “11” and the “16R time reduction 100 times small hit” is won, the number of rounds Rmax is set to “15” which is one round less.

  Subsequent to the process of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of the game balls to the special winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the big hit game also stored in the main RAM 103. The number of rounds R is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S725). The number of rounds R is set to “0” before the start of the big hit game, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S725 is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 starts opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and determines whether or not the opening time, which is an elapsed time since the start of the opening control, is controlled. The measurement is started (Step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has been started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S721: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current state stored in the main RAM 103 in the jackpot game, It is determined whether the ending period is immediately after the end of the last round (step S729). Here, when it is determined that it is during the ending period (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744 described below.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S729: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current state stored in the main RAM 103 in the jackpot game, It is determined whether or not it is during the interval period (a period between the long open round game and the next long open round game) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that the interval period is in progress (step S730: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the processing of step S723 has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening 13 at the end of the previous round. Is determined (step S731). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), it is time to start the next round, and the process proceeds to step S724. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S730: NO), it determines that a round game is being performed, and determines based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 115, and determines whether or not the round game has been performed. It is determined whether or not the winning opening switch 115 has been turned “ON” (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the special winning opening switch 115 has been turned “ON” (step S733: YES), the winning number Y of the game ball to the special winning opening 13 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S734). ).

  The main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S728, executes the processing of step S734, or determines that the special winning opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S733: NO). It is determined whether or not a specified opening time has elapsed from the start of opening (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started in the process of step S727 has reached a specified opening time (29.5 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. .

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified release time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current long open round game stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the number matches the game ball number Ymax (for example, “10”) that defines the closing timing of the special winning opening 13 (step S736). Here, when it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the game ball number Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the game ball number Ymax (step S736: YES) or determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the special winning opening control unit At 116, the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (current long opening round game) is ended (step S737).

  Subsequent to the process of step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the jackpot game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of step S723. (Step S738). Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), the time has elapsed since the special winning opening 13 was closed in order to control the start timing of the next long open round game. The measurement of the interval time, which is the time, is started (step S739). The interval time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the determination process of step S731.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740), and sets the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 103 to “ "0" (step S741), and the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the ending period of the jackpot game has started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  When executing the process of step S742 or determining that the ending period is in progress (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S740 has reached the set ending time set in the process of step S723. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S8.

  When determining that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the game state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the big hit game (step S745). Then, the big hit game flag is set to “OFF” in order to end the big hit game (step S746).

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least one time reduction is given after the end of the big hit game, regardless of the type of the hit. For this reason, first, the main CPU 101 sets the time reduction game flag to “ON” in order to shift the game state to the time reduction game state (step S7450).

  When the time saving game flag is set to “ON”, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of time savings to be given is one (step S7451). In the present embodiment, “7R time savings, one big hit” is prepared as a type of one time savings (see FIGS. 6C and 6D). Therefore, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of time savings to be given is one based on whether or not the type of hit that has triggered the execution of the current big hit game is “7R time savings one big hit”. Is determined.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be given is one (step S7451: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the remaining time savings game number J to “1” (step S7452). In this way, by setting the time-saving game flag to ON and setting the remaining number of time-saving games J to “1”, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, and one second special The time-saving gaming state continues until the symbol determination is performed.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to accumulate four second special symbol determination suspensions during the change display of the second special symbol performed in response to the one-time second special symbol determination. However, when the number of time savings is one, the game state changes from the time saving game state to the normal game state at the timing when the change display of the second special symbol ends, so the four second special symbols that are reserved The determination is made after the transition to the normal game state.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be provided is not one (step S7451: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of time savings to be provided is five (step S7453). In the present embodiment, as the types of hits to which the five time savings are given, “7R time savings 5 times big hits”, “4R time savings 5 times small hits”, and “12R time savings 5 times small hits” are prepared ( (See FIGS. 6C and 6D). For this reason, the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be given is five based on whether the type of hit that has triggered the execution of the current big hit game is any of the above three types of big hits or small hits. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be given is five (step S7453: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the remaining time savings game number J to “5” (step S7454). In this way, by setting the time-saving game flag to ON and setting the remaining number of time-saving games J to “5”, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, and the second special time of five times The time-saving gaming state continues until the symbol determination is performed.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when five time savings are given, four second special symbols are displayed during the second special symbol variable display performed in accordance with the fifth special symbol determination. Although it is possible to accumulate the hold of the symbol determination, if the number of time savings is five, the gaming state shifts from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state at the timing when the fifth variation display of the second special symbol ends. Therefore, all four reserved second special symbol determinations are executed after shifting to the normal game state.

  The main CPU 101 sets the total remaining number of time saving determinations G when the number of remaining time saving games J is set to “1” in the processing of step S7452 or when the number of remaining time saving games J is set to “5” in the processing of step S7454. It is set to “12” (step S7455). As a result, since the total number G of remaining time saving determinations becomes “0”, the common end condition (see FIG. 20) for the case of one time saving and the case of two time savings is satisfied, and the above step S3210 By the processing of (see FIG. 42), the gaming state is shifted from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be provided is not five (step S7453: NO), that is, if the number of time savings to be provided is 100, the main CPU 101 sets the total remaining number of time savings determination G to "100". (Step S7456). As a result, when the total number of time saving determination remaining times G becomes “0”, the end condition (see FIG. 20) specific to 100 time savings is satisfied, and the above-described step S3210 (see FIG. 42) is satisfied. By the processing, the gaming state is shifted from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  By the way, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, it is determined to be “NO” in the process of step S624 (see FIG. 46), and the big hit flag of step S625 is set. The process of setting to “ON” is not executed. Therefore, “NO” is determined in the step S720 of FIG. 47 (see FIG. 47), and as a result, the game state setting process of the step S745 (see FIG. 48) is not executed.

  As is apparent from this description, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198, the game state setting process which should be normally performed at the end of the big hit game , The control that does not shift the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is realized.

[Timer interrupt processing by effect control board 130]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle which is a cycle for performing a timer interrupt process described later. Then, the sub CPU 131 repeats a random number update process for updating the effect random number used for determining the effect content at a predetermined cycle shorter than the CTC cycle. That is, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt processing in the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update processing in the predetermined cycle.

  Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130. The sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 49 every fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed in the game control board 100. The processing performed by the effect control board 130 described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 49 and thereafter is performed in accordance with an instruction issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  First, when a command as game information is received from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command receiving process for performing a process based on the received command (step S10). This command receiving process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S10, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S33). In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening game for opening the small winning opening 19 is being executed. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 determines that the elapsed time from receiving the small winning opening opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S605 (see FIG. It is determined whether or not the small winning opening 19 is being opened based on whether or not 15 seconds (see FIG. 21 in the embodiment).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S32: YES), the small winning opening for performing the above-described remaining time countdown display during the opening game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened. An open process is executed (step S33). The processing during opening of the small winning opening will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S33 or determines that the small winning opening 19 is not being opened (step S32: NO), the result of the challenge battle effect shown in FIG. 24 (winning effect or defeat) It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the effect) (step S42).

The sub CPU 131 realizes a series of RUSH challenge battles (see FIG. 24) at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol corresponding to the first rotation, when the number of time savings after the end of the big hit game is set to one. A variable effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52) for setting a variable effect pattern for the user is performed. Then, a variable effect start command for instructing execution of the effect in the variable effect pattern is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 140. This series of processing is similarly performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol corresponding to the fifth rotation when the number of time savings after the end of the big hit game is set to five.
On the other hand, the overall CPU 141 of the image and sound control board 140 transmits data related to the image and sound control to the effect control board 130 while executing the image and sound control for realizing the effect in the above-mentioned variable effect pattern.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 131 specifies the progress of the RUSH challenge battle based on the data related to the image sound control transmitted from the image sound control board 140 in the above step S42, and based on the specified result, the victory effect or It is determined whether or not it is time to start the defeat effect as a result effect start timing.

  When determining that it is the start timing of the result effect (winning effect or defeat effect) (step S42: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a result effect control process for controlling execution of the result effect (step S43). The result effect control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When executing the processing of step S43 or determining that it is not the start timing of the result effect (step S42: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the command transmission processing (step S50). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the command receiving process in step S10, the small winning opening process in step S33, and the effect production control process in step S43 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). Send to
By performing this command transmission process, execution of an effect by image display, effect sound output, or the like is instructed to the image sound control board 140, and execution of an effect by lighting of various lamps, operation of accessory, or the like is performed by the lamp. An instruction is given to the control board 150.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 executes a data transfer process (step S60). Specifically, since the data relating to the image acoustic control is transmitted from the image acoustic control unit 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control unit 150. Thus, the lamp control unit 150 controls the effect of the effect medium such as the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect character 7 in synchronization with the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, and the like.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S101: NO), the process proceeds to step S32.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S101: YES), the command is controlled in accordance with the processing in step S219 (see FIG. 35) or step S230 (see FIG. 36). It is determined whether or not the command is a hold command transmitted from the board 100 (step S102).

  When determining that the received command is the hold command (step S102: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a hold command receiving process (step S103). This hold command receiving process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the hold command (step S102: NO), the received command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S311 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether the command is a start command (step S105). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the change start command (step S105: YES), a change start command receiving process is executed (step S106). The change start command receiving process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When determining that the received command is not the change start command (step S105: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines the symbol transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether the command is a command (step S108). When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is the symbol confirmation command (step S108: YES), the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of symbol variation when the decorative symbol variation display is ended are displayed. A fluctuation effect end command for instructing execution of the process for final stop is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S109).

  The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is transmitted to the image effect control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the process of step S50 in which the variable effect ending command is transmitted. As the (or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) Are completely stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5.

When determining that the received command is not the symbol confirmation command (step S108: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the received command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S110). . This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and the operated The information includes information indicating whether the button is the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and information indicating which key is operated when the effect key 27 is operated.
When determining that the operation command has been received (step S110: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an operation notification command for notifying that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated in the sub RAM 133 (step S111).

  This operation notification command is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the processing of step S50, thereby notifying that an operation has been performed, and this notification is an operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 28A). ), A victory effect (for example, see FIG. 28B) or a defeat effect (for example, see FIG. 28E) is performed.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not an operation command (step S110: NO), the command for the jackpot opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S3195 (see FIG. 42) Is determined (step S112). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the jackpot opening command (step S112: YES), the setting information for starting the jackpot opening effect of notifying the type of the jackpot or prompting the player to make a right hit. A jackpot opening effect start command including the above is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S113).

  When determining that the received command is not the jackpot opening command (step S112: NO), the sub CPU 131 transmits the command from the game control board 100 according to the process of step S3200 (see FIG. 42). It is determined whether the command is an opening command for use (step S114). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the small hit opening command (step S114: YES), the big hit type display, the right strike suggestion display, the V region instruction display, and the display thereof based on FIG. The small hit opening production start command including the setting information for executing the production of the production sound is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S115).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the small hit opening command (step S114: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S728 (see FIG. 47). It is determined whether the command is a round start command (step S117). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the round start command (step S117: YES), the setting information for notifying the number of rounds during the long open round game of the jackpot game and starting the effect during the round. A round effect start command including the above is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S118).

  When determining that the received command is not the round start command (step S117: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the ending command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S742 (see FIG. 47). It is determined whether or not there is (step S119). Here, when it is determined that the received command is an ending command (step S119: YES), an ending effect start command including setting information relating to the ending effect is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S120).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the ending command (step S119: NO), the small winning prize transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S605 (see FIG. 45) It is determined whether or not the command is a mouth opening start command (step S121). Here, if it is determined that the command is the small winning opening opening command (step S121: YES), the elapsed time from when the small winning opening 19 starts to be opened (that is, the elapsed time since the opening game is started) is measured. Is started (step S122).
The sub CPU 131 controls the remaining time countdown display described above (see FIG. 21) and the output of the effect sound accompanying the countdown display based on the elapsed time.

  Next, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the small winning opening opening command (step S121: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the processing of step S613 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not the command is the transmitted V winning command (step S123). If it is determined that the command is a V winning command (step S123: YES), a V winning notification effect start command for instructing the start of a V winning information effect for notifying the V winning of the game ball is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S123). S124).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is not the V winning command (step S123: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes another process according to the other command (step S125).

[Holding Command Receiving Process by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command receiving process in step 103 of FIG. When determining that the received command is a hold command (step S102: YES), the sub CPU 131 adds “1” to the number of held special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM 133, as illustrated in FIG. The updated value is updated (step S1030). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”, and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. In this case, the number of reserved special second symbol determinations is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

  Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received pending command includes the preliminary determination information (step S1031), and when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received preliminary command does not include the preliminary determination information (step S1031: NO). Then, an icon display command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1037).

  This icon display command is a command for displaying a hold icon indicating that the special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission processing in step S50.

The icon display command includes winning opening information, and the overall CPU 141 of the image and sound control board 140 determines which of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination has been suspended, for example. Specify based on the winning opening information. Here, if it is specified that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, an icon display command instructing execution of a process of displaying a suspension icon in the suspension icon display area 51 is set in the sub RAM 133.
On the other hand, when it is specified that the second special symbol determination has been suspended and, for example, the moving bar 55 is being displayed, an icon display command for instructing execution of processing for displaying a suspension suggestion icon in the right area of the moving bar 55 Is set in the sub RAM 133.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received pending command includes the advance determination information (step S1031: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the advance determination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S1032).

The pre-judgment information may be pre-judgment information on the suspension of the first special symbol judgment, or may be pre-judgment information on the suspension of the second special symbol judgment. The information determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect targeting the reserved icon, and determines what effect pattern of the icon change effect is to be executed when executing the icon change effect. Used for processing.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect (see FIG. 13) for the icon is performed. When the icon change effect is to be performed, what effect pattern is determined. In doing so, the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination is used.

On the other hand, if the information is the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol determination, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the suspension suggestion icon displayed on the moving bar 55 is not performed. The information is not used for the process related to the icon change effect targeting the hold suggestion icon.
In the present embodiment, in order to realize a RUSH challenge battle (see FIG. 24), it is determined which of the result effects to execute before starting a victory effect or a defeat effect as a result of the challenge battle. It is necessary, and the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol determination is used for a process of determining which of a winning effect and a defeating effect is to be performed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, following the processing in step S1032, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S1033). ). Here, when it is determined that the information is not the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S1033: NO), it is not necessary to perform the setting regarding the icon change effect for the suspension suggestion icon, and thus the above-described step S1037 is performed. The processing proceeds.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S1033: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes an icon change effect lottery (step S1034). . Specifically, first, an icon change effect random number is obtained and stored in the sub RAM 133. The icon change effect random number is incremented by “1” each time the above-described random number update process is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change effect random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on whether or not the change effect random number matches any one of the random number values defined in the icon change effect table stored in the sub-ROM 132 in advance. I do.

Although not shown in the figure, the random value specified in the icon change effect table has the following characteristics.
That is, in the icon change effect table, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number are associated with each other.
Then, more random numbers are associated with the "big hit" according to the first special symbol determination than with the "losing" according to the first special symbol determination.
Further, more random numbers are associated with a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long than in a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short.

  For this reason, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier the icon change effect is executed, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder the icon change effect is executed.

  The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the lottery result of step S1034 is a lottery result of executing an icon change effect (step S1035). Here, when it is determined that the result is not the lottery result of executing the icon change effect (step S1035: NO), the process proceeds to step S1037 described above. In this case, since the setting regarding the icon change effect is not performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon is not performed, and the icon change effect for the icon (the icon change success effect or the icon change effect) is not performed. (Including failed productions).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the result is a lottery result of executing the icon change effect (step S1035: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the setting information of the icon change effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1036). Specifically, the following processing is executed. For example, an effect lottery using random numbers is performed, and whether or not to execute an icon change effect targeting the hold icon and whether to execute an icon change effect targeting the icon corresponding to the hold icon decide. When it is determined that the icon change effect for the hold icon is to be executed, one of the plurality of icon change effect patterns is selected, and the selected icon change effect pattern is displayed as the hold icon. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the icon change effect for the target.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the icon change effect for the icon, the sub CPU 131 determines an initial display color of the icon and a final display color of the icon, and determines the display color of the icon. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect for the icon.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1036, and when the setting information of the icon change effect for the reserved icon is set in the sub RAM 133, the sub CPU 131 transmits the icon display command including the setting information to the sub RAM 133 in step S1037. It is set in the RAM 133.

  If the setting information of the icon change effect for the icon is stored in the sub RAM 133, the sub CPU 131 receives the change start command related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon. Then, the following processing is performed.

  For example, when setting information indicating that the initial display color of the icon is white and the final display color of the icon is also white is stored, the sub CPU 131 proceeds to step S1063 (FIG. 52). In the notice effect pattern setting process of FIG. 13), the notice effect pattern for performing only the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13B is set. That is, a notice effect pattern for performing only an icon change failure effect as a so-called gaseous effect is set.

Further, for example, when setting information indicating that the initial display color of the icon is white and the final display color of the icon is red is stored, the following effect pattern is set. Can be set.
For example, as the first announcement effect pattern, an announcement effect pattern in which only the icon change success effect of changing the display color of the icon from white to red (see FIG. 13A) can be set.
Further, as a second announcement effect pattern, an icon change failure effect in which the display color of the icon fails to change from white to red (see FIG. 13B) and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13C) Notice), an unsuccessful rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and an icon change successful effect (see FIG. 13E) that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon from white to red. The effect pattern can be set.
Further, as a third announcement effect pattern, an icon change failure effect in which the display color of the icon fails to change from white to green (see FIG. 13B) and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13C) ), A failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and an upper icon change successful effect that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon from white to red (higher than green before rewind) (see FIG. 13D). A notice effect pattern for performing the process shown in FIG. 13 (F) can be set.

  When a plurality of preview effect patterns can be executed as described above, the sub CPU 131 executes, for example, a lottery using random numbers to select any one of the advance effect patterns, and issues a notice regarding the icon change effect. Set the production pattern.

[Change start command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command receiving process in step S106 in FIG. When determining that the command received from the game control board 100 is the change start command (step S105: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG.

  That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time of receiving the change start command from the game control board 100 and stores the value in the sub RAM 133 with respect to the effect random number appropriately updated by the above-described random number update processing (step S1060). The change start command is analyzed (step S1061).

  As described above, the change start command includes, as described above, the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the symbol setting information relating to the second special symbol determination. The information includes winning start opening information indicating whether the game machine is a winning pattern, setting information of a change pattern of a special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the change start command, the type and the result of the special symbol determination can be specified. In other words, specify whether it is a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a loss, if it is a jackpot, what kind of jackpot is it, and if it is a small jackpot, specify what kind of jackpot it is Can be. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for a loss based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. . Also, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the setting information of the variation pattern. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

  When analyzing the fluctuation start command, the sub CPU 131 executes a fluctuation effect pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation effect pattern of the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1062). By executing the variation effect pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect (reach rewind effect in the present embodiment), the type of the decoration symbol constituting the reach symbol, The type and content of the reach effect, the content of the pseudo continuous effect, the numbers indicated by the left small symbol and the right small symbol in the reach mode when executing SPSP reach or story reach, the presence or absence of the RUSH challenge battle, the decorative symbol and the small pattern to be permanently stopped The type of the symbol and the like are determined. When the preliminary determination information relating to the second special symbol determination indicating the small hit is stored in the sub-RAM 133, the three small symbols including the small and medium symbols indicating "V" are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped. Fluctuating effect pattern is set. In this case, the three small symbols that have been rotating at a high speed are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a reach-losing eye including the small and medium symbols indicating "V", and in response to the symbol determination command being transmitted from the game control board 100, These three small symbols are completely stopped.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a very short fluctuation time of 1 second, the sub CPU 131 sets the fluctuation effect pattern for performing only the high-speed rotation of the three small symbols, and 2 If the preliminary determination information indicating “small hit” is stored in the sub RAM 133 with respect to the remaining hold related to the special symbol determination, in response to the transmission of the symbol determination command from the game control board 100, “V Is set and transmitted to the image sound control board 140.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 mainly displays the announcement effect patterns of various announcement effects mainly indicating the jackpot reliability, which are executed when the decorative symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed in the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162. An announcement effect pattern setting process to be set is executed (step S1063). By executing the processing of step S1063, as described above, the notice effect pattern of the icon change effect for the icon may be set.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in this step S1063, for example, a step-up effect that can be developed stepwise up to any step equal to or less than the predetermined number of steps is executed with a predetermined number of predetermined steps as an upper limit. Is determined, and when it is determined that the step-up effect is to be executed, a process of determining an effect pattern to execute the step-up effect is performed. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute a conversation announcement effect that displays a conversation window indicating a state in which a predetermined character makes a speech, and if it is determined that the conversation announcement effect is to be executed, what effect pattern is to be used to execute the conversation announcement effect Is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 executes a subroutine for starting the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation effect pattern set in the processing of step S1062 and instructing the execution of the notice effect in the preview effect pattern set in the processing in step S1063. It is set in the RAM 133 (step S1064).

  This fluctuation effect start command includes information indicating the fluctuation effect pattern set by the process of step S1062 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S1063, and includes the command transmission process of step S50. Is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Thereby, the variable effect and the announcement effect in which the effect pattern is set on the effect control board 130 are realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1064, the sub CPU 131 subtracts “1” from the number of reservations stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1065). Specifically, if the change start command received from the game control board 100 is to notify the start of the symbol change related to the first special symbol determination, the number of reserved special symbol determinations is subtracted by “1”. Update to the specified value. On the other hand, when the received change start command is to notify the start of the symbol change related to the second special symbol determination, the number of hold of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”.

[Processing during opening of small winning opening by effect control board 130]
FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the processing during opening of the small winning opening in step S33 in FIG. If the sub CPU 131 determines that the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S32: YES), first, the elapsed time (after the opening game is started) in which the measurement is started in the processing of step S122 (see FIG. 50). Is determined to have reached 7 seconds (step S331). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached 7 seconds (step S331: NO), the process proceeds to step S334 described below.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the elapsed time has reached 7 seconds (step S331: YES), based on whether or not the V winning command has already been received, the game ball switches the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game. Is determined (step S332). Here, when it is determined that the game ball has already passed the V winning opening switch 198 (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S334.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 (step S332: NO), the sub CPU 131 displays the remaining time countdown display (see FIGS. 21, 22D and 22E). Execute (step S333). Specifically, a command for instructing the image acoustic control board 140 to execute the remaining time countdown display is set in the sub RAM 133.

  When executing the process of step S333, the sub CPU 131 determines that the elapsed time has not reached 7 seconds (step S331: NO), and determines that the game ball has already passed the V winning opening switch 198. If it has been performed (step S332: YES), it is determined whether a V winning command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S334).

  When determining that the V winning command has been received (step S334: YES), the sub CPU 131 notifies the end of the V region instruction display (see FIGS. 21 and 22 (C)) performed before the start of the opening game by image sound. An instruction is given to the control board 140 (step S335). Specifically, for example, an end command for instructing the end of the V region instruction display is set in the sub RAM 133. Then, for example, based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the remaining time countdown display in the process of step S333 has reached the time required for the remaining time countdown display (5 seconds in the present embodiment), the remaining time is determined. It is determined whether or not the countdown display is being executed (step S336). Here, when it is determined that the remaining time countdown display is being executed (step S336: YES), the end of the remaining time countdown display is instructed to the image acoustic control board 140 (step S337). Specifically, for example, an end command instructing the end of the remaining time countdown display is set in the sub RAM 133.

[Result Effect Control Processing by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the result effect control process in step S43 of FIG. When determining that it is the result effect start timing (step S42: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the victory effect pattern has been set (step S431).

  The sub CPU 131 indicates that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” when, for example, the variation display of the second special symbol in the first turn of a time saving period in which the effect of the RUSH challenge battle is performed is started. When the fluctuation start command including the information is received, in the fluctuation effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52), a fluctuation effect pattern is set in which a challenge battle is performed after the reach is established and then a victory effect is performed. In this case, "small hit" is notified in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation, and the small hit game is started in accordance with the "small hit". On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is started, when a variation start command including information indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing” is received, In the variable effect pattern setting process in step S1062 (see FIG. 52), a variable effect pattern is set in which a challenge battle is performed after the reach is established and then a defeat effect is performed.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first rotation is “losing”, the variable effect pattern for performing the defeat effect is set as described above, but is temporarily reserved. If any of the four second special symbol determinations includes one that is determined to be “small hit”, as described above with reference to FIG. 25B and FIG. It is necessary to start the victory effect, not the defeat effect, during the change display of the second special symbol of the rotation.
Therefore, when it is determined that the winning effect pattern has not been set (step S431: NO), the following processing is performed.

  That is, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the victory effect pattern has not been set (step S431: NO), that is, if the defeat effect pattern has been set because the first turn of time is lost, It is determined whether there is a "small hit" (step S432). Specifically, in the time-saving game state, every time a hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received from the game control board 100, the advance determination information included in the hold command is determined in step S1032 (see FIG. 51). Since the process is stored in the sub-RAM 133, the sub-CPU 131 sets the “small hit” in the hold based on whether or not the information indicating “small hit” is included in the preliminary determination information stored in the sub-RAM 133. It is determined whether there is a "hit".

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a “small hit” in the hold (step S432: YES), the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction is performed even if the first rotation of the time reduction is “losing”. Since the victory effect needs to be started from the beginning, for example, the setting information of the variable effect pattern indicating that the defeat effect is stored, which is stored in the sub RAM 133, is rewritten to the variable effect pattern indicating that the victory effect is performed. Thus, the defeat effect pattern is updated to the winning effect pattern (step S433).

  Then, the sub CPU 131 sets the winning effect command including the setting information of the variable effect pattern indicating the updated winning effect pattern in the sub RAM 133 in order to cause the image and sound control board 140 to start the winning effect (step S434). The victory effect command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S50, whereby the victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) is performed following the challenge battle (see FIG. 24 (H)). Will be

  On the other hand, when the first rotation of the time reduction is "small hit", the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction is started in order to notify the "small hit" of the first rotation of the time reduction. Since the execution of the variable effect in the variable effect pattern indicating the victory effect pattern has already been instructed, there is no need to instruct the start of the victory effect again, and therefore, when it is determined that the victory effect pattern has been set. In the case of (Step S431: YES), the process proceeds to the command transmission process of Step S50.

  Further, if the first rotation of the time saving is “losing”, the loss is performed when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is started in order to notify the “losing” of the first rotation of the time saving. Execution of the variable effect in the variable effect pattern indicating the effect pattern has already been instructed. Therefore, when there is no “small hit” in the holdings 1 to 4 (all are “losing”), it is not necessary to instruct the start of the defeat effect again. Therefore, when it is determined that there is no “small hit” in the hold (step S432: NO), a series of result effect control processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the command transmission processing of step S50.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the image audio control board 140. The image acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 55 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during a normal operation excluding a special case such as a power-on or a power-off. I do.

  First, the central CPU 141 executes an image output control process for controlling image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the command received from the effect control board 130 (step S71). This image output control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S71, the central CPU 141 executes effect sound output control processing for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 24 in synchronization with or asynchronously with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 ( Step S72).

  Subsequent to the process of step S72, the centralized CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data relating to the image sound control performed in the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the frame lamp 25, the board lamp 37, the stage combination 7 and the like are controlled so as to synchronize with the effect performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Image output control processing by image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 71 of FIG. First, the supervisor CPU 141 determines whether or not a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

  On the other hand, when determining that the command has been received from the effect control board 130 (step S711: YES), the central CPU 141 sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 143 (step S712). Next, the overall CPU 141 determines how to display various effect images on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, creates a display list for controlling the drawing processing of the VDP 144, and generates a display list. The display list is stored in the RAM 143 (step S713), and set in the display list storage area of the VDP 144 (step S714). The display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing in frame units, and includes a type of an image to be drawn, a position (coordinates) at which the image is drawn, a display priority, a display magnification, a rotation angle, and a transparency. It contains various parameters such as rate.

[Operation and effect of the present embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, since both the failed rewind effect and the reach rewind effect can be executed, a high effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect of these two types of rewind effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is “losing”, the effect performed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving (victory effect: FIG. 30A shows an effect performed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving when the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first rotation of the time saving is “small hit”. (Victory production: see FIG. 28 (B)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, if the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even after seven seconds have elapsed since the start of the opening game (the first round game), the remaining time is counted down. Display is performed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a state in which the open game ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game.

[Other Modifications]
Note that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. In addition, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, and the like in the above-described flowcharts are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen diagrams and the like illustrated in the above-described embodiments are merely examples, and may be other modes.

  As another embodiment, a part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140 is executed by the effect control board 130, or a part of the processing executed in the effect control board 130 is executed by the image sound control board 130. 140 may be executed. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the processing executed by the effect control board 130 and the processing executed by the image sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. You may.

1 gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines)
5 Liquid crystal screen (main liquid crystal display)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 1st starting port 12 2nd starting port 13 Big winning opening 16 Gate 17 Slide member 19 Small winning opening 24 Speaker 26 Direction button 38 Slide member 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd special symbol display 43 1st special symbol Hold indicator 44 Second special symbol hold indicator 45 Ordinary symbol indicator 46 Ordinary symbol hold indicator 47 Game status indicator 50 Decorative symbol display area 51 Hold icon display area 52 Applicable area 53 Small symbol display area 54 Right pointing suggestion image 55 moving bar 56 moving icon 57 pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 100 game control board 101 main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
140 Image and sound control board 141 Supervising CPU
142 Control ROM
143 Control RAM
144 VDP
145 Sound DSP
150 Lamp control board 151 Lamp CPU
152 Lamp ROM
153 Lamp RAM
191 Slide member 192 Restriction piece 194 Small winning opening switch 195 Slide member 197 Loss winning opening switch 198 V winning opening switch

Claims (1)

Variable prize means provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, which can be changed to a non-passing state in which the game ball does not pass, and an easy passage state in which the game ball easily passes,
A special prize area provided in the variable prize means, in which a game ball can be awarded,
Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game for controlling the variable winning means to the easy passage state;
A special game execution means for executing the special game when the judgment means judges that the special game is to be executed;
Game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
And effect control means for controlling the effect,
The game state control means,
When the special game is being executed, based on a game ball winning in the special winning area, a game state after the end of the special game can be controlled to the second game state,
The effect control means,
A first effect of displaying an instruction image for instructing launch of a game ball into the special prize area during execution of the special game;
If a game ball does not pass through the special prize area even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable prize means enters the easy passage state, a predetermined time before the variable prize means enters the non-passage state, A gaming machine, characterized in that it is possible to control execution of a second effect for counting down the remaining time up to the reference time as a reference time.

Images